ISODRAFT Reference Manual (EDocFind - Info)

ISODRAFT Reference Manual
AVEVA Solutions Ltd
Disclaimer
Information of a technical nature, and particulars of the product and its use, is given by AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries without warranty. AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries disclaim any and all warranties and conditions, expressed or implied, to the fullest extent permitted by law. Neither the author nor AVEVA Solutions Ltd, or any of its subsidiaries, shall be liable to any person or entity for any actions, claims, loss or damage arising from the use or possession of any information, particulars, or errors in this publication, or any incorrect use of the product, whatsoever.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied with it) belongs to AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. All other rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made. The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. The user may also not reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of the product described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution. The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions of the respective licence agreements, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited. First published September 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd, and its subsidiaries 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom
Trademarks
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden. AVEVA product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide). The copyright, trade mark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product, its name or logo belongs to its respective owner.
Contents
Page
ISODRAFT
Introduction to this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 How this Manual is Organised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Command Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Setting Up ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolting .............................................................. DESIGN Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piping Components in ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customising the Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials List and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isometric Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3 2:4 2:4 2:4 2:5 2:6 2:7
Alphabetical Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9

ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9 ANGLEACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10 ATEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11 ATTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12 ATTANAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13 AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14 BENDRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15 BOLTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd
12.0
BOLTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18 BOLTREPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20 BORES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21 CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:22 CHARHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24 CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24 CLLENGTHFILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26 CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27 CONTNOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27 CONTWELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28 COORDINATES or COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28 CUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30 CUTMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32 CUTPIPELISTFILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33 CUTTINGLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35 DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36 DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37 DELIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37 DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38 DIMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:41 DIMENSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:43 DISTANCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:47 DTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48 ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:49 EQUIPMENTNUMBERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:49 FALLINGLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50 FALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54 FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 FLOWARROWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57 FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58 INSTALL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58 INSTNAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59 INSULATIONCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60 ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61 ISOTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62 ITEMCODE (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:63 ITEMCODE (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:65 JOINTNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:66 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67 LEGLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:68
ii
12.0
LINETHICKNESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:68 LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69 MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69 MARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70 MATCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72 MATERIALLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73 MATLISTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:79 MESSAGEACCURACY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:80 MESSAGEFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:81 MTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:82 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83 OUTCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83 OVERALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:87 PBENDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:87 PICTURESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88 PLOTDETAILDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89 PLOTTINGSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90 POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91 POSTPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98 PRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98 PREPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98 PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99 PROJECTNUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99 Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100 RECREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101 REFDIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102 REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102 REPEATABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104 RESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105 SETCOMPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106 SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:107 SKEWBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:107 SPECBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:113 SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:114 SPOOLNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:115 STACKINGARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:117 SUPPORTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:118 SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:119 SYMBOLFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120 TAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120
iii
12.0
TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEXTPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TITLEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACINGCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRANSFERFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TUBESPLITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNDERLAYPLOTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNITS ............................................................ WASTAGE AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WELDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WELDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WELDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZEROLENGTHSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:121 2:122 2:122 2:123 2:124 2:125 2:126 2:127 2:127 2:128 2:130 2:131 2:132 2:134 2:135
Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
P-points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
CAP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3 CLOS Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4 COUP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4 CROS Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 FBLI Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 FILT Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 FLAN Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13 FTUB Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15 INST Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16 LJSE Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21 PCOM Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21 REDU Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25
Concentric Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25 Eccentric Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:28
SHU Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30
iv
12.0
TRAP Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34 UNIO Symbol Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36 UNIVERSAL Symbol Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36 VALV Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:37 VENT Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39 VFWA Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39 VTWA Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40 WELD Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41 Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41 Welded Lug Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42 Symbol Key Reference Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42
Alternative Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Isometric Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Title Block Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5 Plotted Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6 Line Summary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 Printed Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9 Weld Box Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9 Bend Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 Dynamic Detail Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 Bolt Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Creating a Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Overall File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2 Material Control File Record Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3 Individual Formats for Each Type of Information Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Example of a Material Control File Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10
Error Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
12.0
Examples of Isometric Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1 Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C:1
Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1 Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1 Pipe Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2 Detail Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2
Itemcodes containing the / character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2 Instruments and Supports Tag Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3 Material per Isometric Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3 Specification Breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3 System and Spool Isometrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3 Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:3
Format of COMPIPE Linelist File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:4 Format of COMPIPE MTO FIle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:5
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1 Importing a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1 Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1
Installing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:1 Utilities/Install Fonts menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:2
DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the Import Function . . . . . . . . D:2 Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:2 Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:3 Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:3 Plotting the DGN file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D:4
vi
12.0

Introduction to this Manual

This document is a Reference Manual for ISODRAFT. It describes all the commands available to control the production of isometric drawings. It also shows the default Symbol KEYs (SKEYs) that are used to plot the drawings and gives examples of PLOT files.
1.1
Who Should Use This Manual

This manual is aimed at experienced PDMS users and system administrators, who are responsible for setting company standards for isometric production. It is assumed readers have attended an Isometric Drawing Production training course, which covers the relationship between the Catalogue database and ISODRAFT as well as ISODRAFT itself.
1.2
How this Manual is Organised

This manual is divided up into a number of logical chapters, as follows: Command Reference Section - gives reference information for all of the ISODRAFT commands. Symbol Keys - illustrates the standard symbols used in ISODRAFT drawings, with their reference codes (SKEYs), dimension and cataloguing requirements. Alternative Texts - provides a complete listing of all standard text phrases used in ISODRAFT drawings, with their reference codes (Alternative text or ATEXT numbers). Material Control File - describes the Material Control File which can be used to pass details of material requirements to an external material control program. Error Messages - explains the error messages which may be output during an ISODRAFT session. Examples of Isometric Plots - contains examples of isometric plots illustrating the main facilities provided by ISODRAFT. Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module - gives details of how to pass ISODRAFT material data to the COMPIPE module of the COMDACE system. This is specialist information and need only be read by those users who will use this facility. Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation - gives details of how to import ISODRAFT Isometric drawings into MicroStation as DXF files and then correct any colour and font errors that may occur.
1:1
12.0

1.3
Conventions Used in This Manual

Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. In general, these commands can be abbreviated. When a command is shown in this manual, the capital letters of the command indicate the minimum abbreviation. Note: This convention does not mean that you have to type the second part of the command in lowercase letters. You can enter commands in any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. For example, you can enter the command Check in any of the following forms:
CH CHE CHEC CHECK

You cannot abbreviate commands shown wholly in uppercase letters. Lowercase italics describe command arguments. You should replace the description shown by the text or value you require. Here are some examples: Name name refno integer value word text filename Definition A PDMS element name A PDMS reference number A positive integer A positive or negative number A sequence of up to four letters An alphanumeric string The path name of a file Example /PIPE-A63 =23/1403 3 3.142 FLOW Enclose between closing quotes //net/sg99/testing. Note that when a full path name is given, it will start with two slashes: the first one is needed because all names in PDMS must start with a slash, and the second one is the root of the path name.
1:2
12.0

Command Reference Section
2
2.1

Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs
The commands described in this chapter are presented in the form of syntax graphs. Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, where the capital letters indicate the minimum abbreviation.
Note: This convention does not mean that the second part of the command must be typed in lowercase letters; commands may be entered in any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. For example, the command:
Create
can be input in any of the following forms:
CR CRE CREA CREAT CREATE

Commands shown in all uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated. Command arguments are shown in lowercase letters. These are just descriptions of what you need to enter. For example:
FONTDirectory name
means that to set the name of the Font Directory to newfonts, you enter
FONTD newfonts
Syntax graphs are read from top left to bottom right. The start point is shown by >, and you can follow any path through the graph until the exit point, shown by >, is reached. Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input any one of the commands to the right of the junction. For example:
>---+--- ABC ---. | | |--- PQR --- | | | ------------+->
means you can type in ABC or PQR or just press Enter to get the default option. Text in angle brackets <. . . > is the name of another syntax graph. This convention is used for syntax which occurs in many places. The graphs referred to are described at the end of this section. For example:
2:1
12.0

>---+--- ABC -----. | | |--- PQR -----| | | |--- <dia> ---| | | -------------+--->
means you can type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given in diagram <dia> or just press Enter to get the default option. Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop back junctions. Command options following these may be repeated as required. For example:
.-----<-------. / | >---*--- option1 ---| | | |--- option2 ---| | | --- option3 ---+--->
means that you can enter any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3, where the options can be commands, other syntax diagrams, or command arguments. The simplified format
.----<------. / | >---*--- name ----+--->
means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space. Names in lowercase letters enclosed in angled brackets (e.g. <gid>) represent subsidiary syntax diagrams. Most of the subsidiary syntax diagrams are given in the Software Customisation Guide. The only ones used in this manual are <gid> and <uval>. In ISODRAFT, the <gid> syntax has the restricted range of options shown here.
>---+--- name ----. | | --- refno ---+--->
The full range of options for <gid> are shown in the Command Reference Section of the Software Customisation Guide. They apply only to database navigation operations. <uval> is used to enter a dimension using a unit of measurement which is not the current default unit:
>---+-- value -----. | | -- <expres> --+-- EXponential -- value --. | | --------------------------+--| |--| |--| |--| |--| |---
MM -------. | Metres ---| | INches ---| | FT -------| | FEet -----| | text -----|
2:2
12.0

| | --------------+-->
where <expres> is another subsidiary diagram representing the range of mathematical expressions which can be used to input values, and text represents a user-defined unit of measurement. Using expressions in PDMS is described in the Software Customisation Guide. For example:
9.75 INCH 1.5 FT

Note: For information about the syntax for PML, the PDMS Programmable Macro Language, and the PDMS forms and menus, see the Software Customisation Guide.
2.2
Command Summary
The following sections list the MODULE commands in functional groups. These sections correspond to Chapters 2 to 9 in the ISODRAFT User Guide.
2.2.1
Setting Up ISODRAFT
COMMAND ADD CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING CHECK
Brief description Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processed by the CHECK or DETAIL command. Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colour pen. Extracts isometric data from the database but does not pass it to the plotting function. This is used to check the data or create a transfer file. Generates and plots isometric drawings for the elements in the list. Specifies the name of the PLOT file to which the isometric drawing output is sent. Restores the settings to those saved in the macro or binary file using the RECREATE command. Specifies the name of the file to which messages about the progress of the detailing are sent. Allows you to reset all options to their default settings. Allows you to find the current settings of the options. Creates a macro or binary file which can be read into ISODRAFT to restore the current settings. Removes elements from the list to be detailed. Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB.
DETAIL FILE INSTALLSETUP MESSAGEFILENAM E OPTIONS Query RECREATE REMOVE SETCOMPDATE
2:3
12.0

2.2.2
Bolting
COMMAND BOLTFILE BOLTING BOLTREPORT
Brief description Specifies the name of the bolt report file, produced using the BOLTREPORT command. Specifies where and how the bolt lengths are to be shown in the material list. Allows you to output a report on the bolting containing identical information to that displayed in the material list.
2.2.3
DESIGN Requirements
COMMAND JOINTNUMBERS MATERIAL PARTNUMBERS FROMDB PBENDNUMBERS
Brief description Allows you to display the joint numbers created in SPOOLER on the isometric. Allows you to select whether to use the part numbering from the DB. Allows you to display the pulled bend numbers created in SPOOLER on the isometric. Lets you specify whether to use the numbers created by SPOOLER or let ISODRAFT number the spools itself. Lets you decide whether to use the numbers created by SPOOLER or let ISODRAFT number the spools itself.
SPOOLNUMBERS FROMDB
WELDNUMBERS FROMDB
2.2.4
Piping Components in ISODRAFT
COMMAND LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE
Brief description Allows you to specify an additional length on cut tube to compensate for field-fitted welds and loose flanges, where the ALLO attribute has not been set.
2:4
12.0

2.2.5
Customising the Drawing Sheet
COMMAND ATEXT CUTMARKS DATE DISTANCES FRAME ISO ISOTYPE MARGIN MARK
Brief description Allows you to change the standard text on isometric drawings. Draws cut marks at each corner of the overall drawing sheet. Allows you to specify the format for showing the date in the drawings title block. Allows you to specify the units to be used for input of lengths and distances. Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and text are drawn. Defines the view direction to be used for generating the isometric plot. Defines whether the isometric will show fabrication information, erection information or both. Specifies the width of the margin on each side of the drawing. Allows you to define whether the pipe revision attribute (REV) should be incremented and the Branch detail attribute should be set to true after successful detailing. Allows you to define whether and how to display parameterised attribute data in the detail PLOT files. Defines the scale of the plot independently of the drawing sheet size. Writes the project number into the title block area. Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom of either the drawing or material list areas. Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawing sheet. Allows you to define how to position multiple plots on a single sheet. Allows you to add extra text to the title block. Allows you to define a background PLOT file; letting you plot directly on top of this background plot.
PLOTDETAILDATA PLOTTINGSCALE PROJECTNUMBER RESERVE SIZE STACKINGARRANGEMENTS TITLEBLOCK UNDERLAYPLOTNAME
2:5
12.0

2.2.6
Materials List and Reports
COMMAND ATTEXTS
Brief description Defines selection rules and expressions (typically attribute values) for appending attached text to descriptions in material lists. Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with or without an insulation centreline summary, should be output as a report. Produces a customisable report giving details of all cut pipes in the isometric. Defines a table in the material list showing details of all the cut pipes in the isometric. Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises as the itemcode suffix delimiter. Controls the material description part of the item description. Controls numbering of items on materials list for an equipment trim isometric. Allows you to define how instruments are described in the materials list. Allows you to label certain types of fitting with their itemcodes on the isometric drawing. Allows components with specified SKEYs to be treated like instruments. Allows you to control whether the material list is drawn on the isometric and alter the display format if required. Specifies the name of the file into which the materials list can be saved. Controls the complete material description part of the item description. Specifies the name of a file into which the schedule for pipe supports is saved. Defines wastage areas that can be given different wastage factors for cut pipe lengths.
CLLENGTHFILE
CUTPIPELISTFILE CUTTINGLIST DELIMITER DTEXTS EQUIPMENTNUMBERING INSTNAME ITEMCODE KEYS MATERIALLIST MATLISTFILENAME MTEXTS SUPPORTFILENAME WASTAGEAREA
2:6
12.0

2.2.7
Isometric Drawing
COMMAND ANGLEACCURACY ATTANAME AXES BENDRADIUS CHARSIZE CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS CONTNOTES
Brief description Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for the reporting of angles. Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are identified. Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing 3D positions on drawings. Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown and in what units. Specifies the character size to be used for annotating text on drawings. Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected to nozzles on plant equipment. Specifies continuation notes at the end points on drawings for when the connection goes to another isometric. Specifies the drawing coordinates are shown. locations at which spatial
COORDINATES DIMDIST DIMENSIONS ELEVATION FALLINGLINES FALLSKEWS FLOWARROWS INSULATIONCONTROL LEGLENGTH MESSAGEACCUR-ACY OUTCOM
Specifies the standout distance, between dimensioning lines and pipe/ component centrelines. Specifies dimensioning style. Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to be shown. Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipeline before it is shown as a skew. Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed/falling pipelines are shown. Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots. Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted. Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows, tees and crosses. Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric are positioned. Defines the style in which attributes are shown on the isometric drawing area.
2:7
12.0

COMMAND OVERALLSKEWS
Brief description Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes are shown as overall skewboxes across branches, or as separate skewboxes between branch connections. Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing. Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off. Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated split points. Controls how skewed piping is shown. Specifies the level at which a change of pipeline specification is noted, and which changes are shown. Controls the number of drawing sheets used when a pipeline is split over more than one sheet. Defines whether support positions are shown and are dimensioned as overall or string dimensions. Allows you to identify individual components on the isometric plot by means of name tags. Specifies the maximum misalignment between components regarded as having the same axis. Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted. Stops rounding remainders of dimensions being added to the next dimension. Controls how splits in tube are placed. Specifies units of measurement to be used for ISODRAFTs output. Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric by name. Controls numbering the welds on an isometric. Controls which types of end connection are shown on drawings. Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line.
PICTURESCALE REFDIMENSIONS REPEATABILITY SKEWBOX SPECBREAK SPLIT SUPPORTS TAGGING TOLERANCE TRACINGCONTROL TRUNCATE TUBESPLITS UNITS WELDID WELDNUMBERS WELDTYPE ZEROLENGTH-SKEWS
2:8
12.0

2.3
2.3.1
Alphabetical Command Reference

ADD
Function: Description:
Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processed by the next CHECK or DETAIL command. The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can be defined before giving a CHECK or DETAIL command by setting up a Detail List. You add elements to the list using the ADD command and remove them using the REMOVE command. (The REMOVE command is often used to remove members of an owning element such as Site or Zone which have been added.) The next CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command will then process all the elements in the Detail List. If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can be stored in the DESIGN database. As such, individual sheets can be added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY command.
Examples:
ADD /ZONE2 /PIPE3-2 Adds Zone 2 and PIPE3-2 to the Detail List. ADD SHEE 2 /PIPE-2 Adds sheet 2 of PIPE-2 to the Detail List. ADD SHEE SING /PIPE2 Adds /PIPE-2 to the Detail List, and specifies that the isometric will be plotted on a single sheet ADD SPOO 2 /PIPE-4 Adds spool 2 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List. ADD SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4 Adds spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List. This form of the command can only be used in conjunction with SPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING. ADD SPOO SPOO20 /PIPE-5 Adds the spool identified by the text SPOO20 of /PIPE-5 to the Detail List
Related Commands:
REMOVE
CHECK
DETAIL
REPEATABILITY
2:9
12.0

Command Syntax:
.----<---------------------------------------------. / | >- ADD --*-- <gid> -------------------------------------------| | | |-- SHEETNumber --+-- integer --. | | | | | | '-- SINGle ---+------------. | | | | -- SPOOl ---+-- integer --.-- OF integer --| | | | | | | '-----------------| | | | | -- text -----------------------+-<gid>-+->
Restrictions:
The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in an Add List is 100. The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only add sheets for a Pipe which has previously been detailed with REPEATABILITY on, so that split points have been stored in the DESIGN database. See the REPEATABILITY command.
Querying:
Q DETaillist Lists contents of both Add and Remove lists.
2.3.2
ANGLEACCURACY
Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for the reporting of angles on the isometric. For bend and elbow angles, and orientation angles for tees, valve and instrument spindles, you can vary the accuracy with which ISODRAFT reports the angle on the isometric. You can use one of two settings: 0 1 To the nearest 0.1 degree (default) To the nearest 0.01 degree
Examples:
ANGLEACC 1 Sets angle reporting accuracy to the nearest 0.01 degree.
Related Commands: Command Syntax:
FALLINGLINES
>--- ANGLEACCuracy value --->
where value is either 0 or 1 (as described above).
2:10
12.0

2.3.3
ATEXT
Allows you to change standard text on isometric drawings. Each standard annotation text on an ISODRAFT drawing is identified by a unique code number, known as its Atext (Alternative Text) number. The ATEXT command allows you to change the text characters associated with a particular Atext number, so that your text replaces the standard text at the same place on the drawing. Alternative text should contain only standard ISODRAFT characters, since certain keyboard symbols cannot be reproduced by ISODRAFT. The normal character set for ISODRAFT consists of: The letters A to Z inclusive The letters a to z inclusive The numbers 0 to 9 inclusive The space character +*.,[]():#=| Text can be deleted by redefining it as a null string, that is, the Atext number followed by two quotes with no characters between them. Text is reset to the standard by giving the command ATEXT just followed by the Atext number. See Alternative Texts for a list of all standard Atexts with their corresponding Atext numbers.
Examples:
ATEXT 15 STRAIGHT TUBE Sets Atext 15 to the specified wording. ATEXT 15 Resets Atext 15 to its default wording, STRAIGHT PIPE. ATEXT 410 Deletes Atext number 410, the line summary note.
Command Syntax:
>-- ATExt -- atextnumber --+-- newtext --. | | -------------+-->
where atextnumber identifies the text to be changed and newtext defines the new text to be associated with that Atext number. (Note that newtext must be enclosed between quotes in the usual way.)
2:11
12.0

Querying:
Q ---- ATExt ---+--| |--| |--| |--| |--| |--| |--| |--| |--| ---
integer --------. | DRAWing --------| | TITLeblock -----| | PRINtedmatl ----| | PLOTtedmatl ----| | LINEsummary ----| | WELDbox --------| | BOLTreport -----| | BENDtable ------| | ALL ------------+--->
Q ATEXT 15 Q ATEXT DRAW
Gives current text for Atext 15. Gives current text for all Atexts associated with the drawing area. Alternative Texts lists Atexts grouped under the areas with which they are associated. Settings changed from the default are shown by asterisks *. Gives current text for all Atexts. Settings changed from the default are shown by asterisks *.
Q ATEXT ALL
2.3.4
ATTEXTS
Allows you to append text,typically UDA and/or other attribute settings, to descriptions in material lists. Standard descriptions in material lists comprise a geometric description (RTEX attribute of DTEXT) and a material description (XTEX attribute of MTEXT). This command lets you append further text defined by an expression (typically including settings of UDAs or other attributes) if a predefined selection rule gives a True result.
2:12
12.0

Examples:
ATTEX (Flange '+AFTER (NAME,'/')+' at position '+STR (POS)+' has 'STR (NWELDS)+' additional welds') ON all flange with (NWELDS GT 0) If a flange has additional welds, appends the text 'Flange / name at position position has number additional welds' to the item description in the material list. ATTEX (Colour: ' + :Colour) ON ALL BRANCH MEMBERS Appends the text 'Colour: colour_defined_by_UDA_ :Colour' to the descriptions of all branch members.
Command Syntax:
>- ATTEXts -+- expression - ON - selection_rule -. | | - NONE -----------------------------+-->
where expression defines the text to be appended if selection_rule evaluates to a True result.
2.3.5
ATTANAME
Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are identified on ISODRAFT drawings. By default, the names of support attachment points (that is, all ATTAs for which the ATTY attribute is unset) are not shown on the isometric plot and their SPREFs (specification references) are used as their itemcodes. You can use the ATTANAME command to display the PDMS names of support ATTAs on the drawings, and to specify whether their PDMS names or their SPREFs are used as their itemcodes. By default, ATTA names are not shown on the isometric plot and their SPREFs are used as their itemcodes.
Examples:
ATTANAME DRAWING
Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing; SPREFs used as itemcodes.
ATTANAME SPREF
Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing; names also used as itemcodes.
ATTANAME OFF
ATTA names not shown on drawings; SPREFs used as itemcodes.
2:13
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- ATTAName ---+--- DRAwing ---. | | |--- SPREf -----| | | --- OFF* ------+---> Q ATTAName Q OPTions
Querying:
2.3.6
AXES
Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing 3D positions on drawings. By default, all spatial coordinates on isometrics are given in the World coordinate system. The AXES command allows you to specify a different coordinate system for the isometric. You can use the origin of any database element which has an origin. Each owning element (Site, Zone etc.) in a design project has its own coordinate system for locating the elements it owns. The coordinates of an element are usually defined with respect to its owner, and these coordinates are not normally the same as World coordinates.
Examples:
AXES /SITE_PIPE-2
All coordinates to be referred to the origin of site SITE_PIPE-2.
AXES
Command Syntax: Querying:
WORLD
Resets to the default of the World coordinates.
>--- AXES --- <gid> --->

Q AXES Q OPTions
Note: To minimise inaccuracies when performing calculations using very large coordinates, ISODRAFT performs all its calculations relative to the origin of the Zone that owns the first Branch in the detail list. Thus when creating piping a great distance from the World origin, it is beneficial to move the Zone origin first, to a position local to where the piping will be created. (If the Zone origin is at the World origin, no benefit will be gained by this approach.)
2:14
12.0

2.3.7
BENDRADIUS
Function: Description: Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown on drawings and in what units. By default, bend radii will be output in distance units for all pulled bends, that is for all components with SKEYs beginning with PB. The radii of pulled bends are extracted from their RADI attributes. If the RADI attribute is set to zero and the SKEY is of the format PBnD where n is an integer (e.g. PB5D), then the integer will be extracted, multiplied by the pipe diameter, converted to distance units if appropriate, and output as the bend radius. Bend radii can be shown either in distance units or as multiples of pipe diameters (where pipe diameter is taken as the nominal bore of the pipe). The Atexts associated with the output of bend radii are Atext 337, D BEND RADIUS (for bend radii in multiples of pipe diameters), and Atext 338, BEND RADIUS (for bend radii in distance units). Setting either of these to be blank causes the entire message to be suppressed, including the actual radius value. A standard radius for bends can be set using the BENDRADIUS STANDARD command. If a standard radius is set, only bends which have radii different from the standard radius will have their radii shown individually. Both the standard radius and any individual radii will be shown in the same format (i.e. in distance units or in pipe diameters). A note giving the value of the standard radius can be positioned on the sheet using the POSITION command. The usual method is to plot a suitable message , such as:
All pulled bends to be D unless otherwise shown

as part of an underlay (see the UNDERLAYPLOTFILE command). Then use the POSITION command to create text giving the actual radius value in the space immediately before the D. You can also include a table of bending data on the isometric using the POSITION command (see POSITION BENDTABLE command for more details).
2:15
12.0

Examples:
BENDRAD DEFAULT BENDRAD

All bend radii to be shown in current distance units (no standard value).
BENDRAD STAND 200

Bend radii to be shown in mm, but only if not equal to 200mm (assumes current distance units are mm).
BENDRAD DIAM
Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters.
BENDRAD STAND 5 DIAM

Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters, but only if they do not equal 5 diameters.
BENDRAD OFF
No bend radii to be shown on the drawing.
BENDRADIUS STANDARD 5D POSI BENDRADIUS AT X200 Y50

Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Only non-standard radii output on isometric. Both standard note and non-standard radii output in multiples of pipe diameter.
BENDRAD STAN 1000 POSI BENDRAD AT X200 Y50

Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Only non-standard radii output on isometric. Both standard note and non-standard radii output in current distance units (mm or inch). Command Syntax:
>-- BENDRADius --+-- DEFault -----------------------------. | | |-- STANdard -- value --. | | | | |-----------------------+-- Diameters ---| | | | | '----------------| -- OFF ---------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q BENDRADius Q OPTions
2:16
12.0

2.3.8
BOLTFILE
This specifies the name of the bolt report file produced via the BOLTREPORT command. The bolt report file is an ASCII file. You can specify a page length for the file (with a default of 55 lines), and whether the report should append to an existing file (default) or overwrite an existing file.
Examples:
BOLTF /BOLTREP1
Gives the resulting bolt report file the name BOLTREP1. If this file already exists, the information produced from the BOLTREPORT command will be added to the end of the existing file.
BOLTF /BOLTREP1 OVER

Specifies that the bolt report file should overwrite ANY existing file of the same name.
BOLTF /BOLTREP1 WI 70 LI
Specifies that the bolt report file name is BOLTREP1 and that it has a page length of 70 lines. Related Commands: Command Syntax: BOLTING BOLTREPORT MATERIALLIST
>-----BOLTFile filename ---+---OVERwrite--------. | | --WIth value LInes -+--->
2:17
12.0

2.3.9
BOLTING
Specifies where and how bolt lengths are to be shown in the material list. ISODRAFT calculates bolting requirements from the Catalogue bolt tables. Bolt lengths can be included in the itemcode or the item description or both. If bolt lengths are to be included in the itemcodes, they can either be appended to the rest of the code or they can be inserted in place of a specified text string. By default, bolt lengths are included in the item description column of the material list and are appended to the itemcodes. For the Material Control File, you can specify that the lengths and diameters are both shown as metric, or both shown as imperial. Setting the Material Control file units changes the bolt dimensioning units specified by the UNITS command; it sets a flag in the Material Control File (the tens column of Word 2 of Record 60). This flag setting can be interpreted by an independent material control program, which must provide its own look-up tables of standard size conversions to give the required dimensioning units. You can set up the SPCOM name in the Specification to include text which can then be replaced by the bolt lengths to form the itemcode.
2:18
12.0

Examples:
BOLT LENG DESC ON

Bolt lengths shown in description column of material list.
BOLT LENG ITEMCODE INSERT AT Here

Bolt lengths replace locating text Here in the itemcode.
BOLT LENG DESC OFF ITEMCODE INSERT Here

Bolt lengths omitted from description column, but inserted in itemcode column where shown by the Here keyword.
BOLTing BOLTing
LENgth LENgth
ITEMcode ITEMcode
APPend OFF
Adds the bolt length to the end of the itemcode. Bolt lengths not shown in itemcode.
BOLTING DEFAULT
Resets all bolting options to their default states, namely: Lengths shown in descriptions. Lengths appended to itemcodes. Material control units flag set to metric lengths and imperial diameters.
BOLTing OFF
Bolting information will not be shown on the material list.
Command Syntax:
>-BOLTing --+-| | | | | | | | | |-| | | | | | | | | | | | |-| -UNITs --+-| |-| |-| -METImp* ---. | METric ----| | IMPerial --| | DEFault ---+-------------------------------. | .----------------------------------------. | / | | LENgth --*-- DESCription --+-- ON* --. | | | | | | | | '-- OFF --+--------------| | | | | -- ITEMcode --+-- OFF --------------------| | | | | |-- APPend* ----------------| | | | | -- INSert -+- AT -. | | | | | | ------+- text -+--| | | DEFault --. | | | OFF ------+--------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q BOLTing Q OPTions
2:19
12.0

2.3.10
BOLTREPORT
Function: Description: Allows you to output a bolt report containing equivalent information to that contained in the material list. BOLTREPORT generates a material list file relevant to bolting. You dont need to have all the piping geometry correct before creating a report, but you do have to have the pipes populated with flanges and flanged components. Note that it is vital to have connectivity correct before generating the report to make sure that all pipes are fully scanned. You can include positional information in the report, consisting of the centrelines of associated flanges in the coordinate system (as defined by the AXES command) Note that bolting reports can be produced even if you have turned material lists off (with the MATEriallist OFF command). If you specify a filename for the report using the BOLTFILE command the information will be output to an ASCII file. Otherwise the report will be sent to your screen. Finally, you should note that in the material list the the bolt diameter is output in the units determined by the UNITS option, and the bolt length inserted in the itemcode and description is output in units determined by the BOLTING UNITS option (this is because all items in the material list must take the same diameter units). The bolting report, however, does not have this restriction. That is, the units of the diameter of the bolt are determined by the BOLTING UNITS option. The report will contain the following information: Diameter in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING UNITS command) Length in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING UNITS command) Itemcode (format truncated) defined by options settings, not
Description (unless MATERIALLIST NODESCRIPTIONS has been set) Position (if requested in the BOLTREPORT syntax) Quantity for erection and/or quantity for fabrication materials. The quantity will be summated if the diameter, length and itemcode are identical. Erection and fabrication quantities are summated separately.
Examples:
BOLTR /PIPE-1
Outputs a bolting report for PIPE-1.
BOLTR ALL WITH POS

Outputs a bolting report for all pipes in the detail list, including positional information.
2:20
12.0

BOLTING BOLTFILE MATERIALLIST

.---------<---------. | | >-- BOLTReport --+---------+---- <gid> --------| | | | -- ALL --+-- WITH POSition --| | | -------------------+-->
2.3.11
BORES
Allows you to specify the units for input of pipe nominal bores. The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units which are assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) are normally derived from the Catalogue. You may change the default units independently for input of pipe bores and/or distances along pipelines or across components by using the related BORES and DISTANCES commands. Note that the UNITS command is used to set output units. The current default units can be overridden for any item of input data by giving the units explicitly.
Examples:
MM BORES
Input bores assumed to be in mm unless otherwise specified.
INCH BORES
Input bores assumed to be in inches unless otherwise specified.
FINCH BORES
Input bores assumed to be in feet and inches unless otherwise specified (e.g. 13 represents 1ft 3in, 9 represents 9in). Related Commands: Command Syntax: DISTANCES
>---+--| |--| |--| --MILlimetre ---. | MM -----------| | FInch --------| | INch ---------+--- BOres -------. | | --- DIstances ---+--->
Querying:
Q UNIts
2:21
12.0

2.3.12
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING
Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colour. Change Highlighting enables you to set standards for how changed items on drawings will be represented. By default, Change Highlighting is OFF. If set ON, then all changed components complying with the defined change highlighting rules, will be shown in the specified highlight colour. A Change Rule applies to components only. For table entries, material list entries, annotations and dimensions; these will always be drawn in the specified highlight colour if they have changed. The default highlight colour is red. The user may specify one of 12 pen colours to represent the changed items. The integer associated with each colour is as follows: 1 = grey, 2 = red, 3 = orange, 4 = yellow, 5 = green, 6 = cyan, 7 = blue, 8 = violet, 9 = brown, 10 = white, 11 = pink, 12 = mauve. In order to determine which items have changed you must specify a Comparison Date, this determines the baseline in time for the drawing. Any item that has changed since this baseline time will then be subject to Change Highlighting. The Comparison Date is entered either as an actual date/time or as a Stamp. A Stamp is a way of referencing database(s) at specified stages in a project. For more information on Stamps refer to the Administrator Command Reference Manual and the Administrator User Guide.
2:22
12.0

Examples:
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING ON
Turns the Change Highlighting function 'on'.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING OFF

Turns the Change Highlighting function 'off'.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING CLEAR

Removes all defined Change Highlighting rules.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH (MODIFIED())

All modified elbows will be shown in the selected highlight pen colour.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH (MODIFIED(POS))

All elbows whose position has been modified will be shown in the selected highlight pen colour.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING (CREATED())
RULE
ALL
ELBO
WITH
All newly created elbows will be shown in the selected highlight pen colour.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOUR 8

Sets the Change Highlighting pen colour to violet. Related Commands Command Syntax:
>--- CHANGE---|--- HIGHLIGHTING---+-|-|-|--ON ---------------------. OFF --------------------| CLEAR ------------------| COLOUR ----- integer ---| RULE ----+-- UNSET -----| -- <SELATT> --+--->
SETCOMPDATE
Querying:
Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING MODE Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOUR Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE
2:23
12.0

2.3.13
CHARHEIGHT
Specifies the character height to be used for annotating text on drawings. The CHARHeight command defines the height of characters used on isometric drawings. This command does not affect characters: on the material list, which are controlled by the MATERIALLIST CHARHeight command; weld numbers or characters in the title block and frame.
Example:
CHARH 2.0 CHARH 0.125 INCH
corresponds to 2.0mm corresponds to 1/8 inch
>--- CHARHeight - value ----->

Q CHARHeight Q OPTions
2.3.14
CHECK
Creates a transfer file. The CHECK command extracts isometric data from the Design and Catalogue databases and creates a transfer file. The extended CHECK AS ... option allows you to check a complete system isometric with a single command. The extended CHECK AS EQUIPMENT ... option allows you to check a collection of pipes as equipment trim. If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can be stored in the DESIGN database. In this case, individual sheets can be added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY command.
2:24
12.0

Examples:
CHECK /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1

Checks named elements only.
CHECK ALL
Checks the current Detail List (see the ADD and REMOVE commands).
CHECK /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS REFINER

Checks the two named sites and combines the plot information into a single system isometric with the drawing title REFINER.
CHECK SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2

Checks sheet 2 of PIPE-2.
CHECK SPOO 2 /PIPE-4

Checks spool 2 of PIPE-4.
CHECK SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4

Checks spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4.
CHECK ISO BASEFLOOR /SITE2-1 /PIPE2-2-1

Checks the named elements of drawing BASEFLOOR. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
.------------------------------------------. | | >- CHeck -*- <gid> --------------------------------- | | | |- ALL ------------------------------------| | | |- SHEETNumber -+- integer -. | | | | | | - SINGle --+----. | | | | |- SPOOl -+- integ -+- OF integ -| | | | | | | | | -------------| | | | | | | -- text --------------+- <gid> -+- AS -+- text-----------. | | | | | ------+- EQUIpment text-| | | -- ISOdrawing - <gid> ---------------------------------------------+->
ADD
DETAIL
REMOVE SPOOLNUMBERS
Restrictions:
The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in a CHECK command is 100. A maximum of 20 CHECK commands are allowed for a single pipe (sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only check sheets for a Pipe which has previously been detailed with Repeatability on, so that split points have been stored in the DESIGN database. See the REPEATABILITY command. Sheets and spools can be specified in the same command as normal pipes.
Querying:
Q DETaillist
Shows the current content of the Drawlist.
2:25
12.0

2.3.15
CLLENGTHFILE
Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with or without an insulation centreline summary, should be output. ISODRAFT can produce two types of summary which can be output to file: A pipe centreline length summary A pipe plus insulation centreline length summary Note: The materials list can also be output to a file using the MATLISTFILENAME command.
Examples:
CLLE /FILE1
Produces a pipe centreline length summary only.
CLLE INSU /FILE1

Produces a pipe plus summary. insulation centreline length
CLLE INSU /FILE1 OVER

Produces a pipe plus insulation centreline length summary, overwriting contents of FILE1.
CLLE OFF
Suppresses any further generation of centreline summary files. This is the default state. Command Syntax:
>--- CLLEngthfile --+----------------. | | |-- INSUlation --+-- filename --+-- OVER ---. | | | | -----------| | | |----- OFF* --------------------------------| | | -------------------------------------------+--->
Restrictions:
Note: That pipe and pipe plus insulation summaries cannot both be produced in a single run. If either type of file is specified, the other is suppressed automatically. Q CLLENGTHFILE
Querying:
2:26
12.0

2.3.16
CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS
Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected to nozzles on plant equipment. Dotted nozzles can be plotted on isometrics at points where connections are made to plant equipment. This command can only be used for combined or erection-only isometrics. The default is that nozzles will not be plotted.
Examples:
CONT NOZZles
Plots dotted nozzles.
CONT OFF
Switches dotted nozzle plotting off. Command Syntax:
>--- CONTinuationsymbols ---+--- NOZZles ---. | | --- OFF * -----+--->
Querying:
Q CONTinuationsymbols Q OPTIONS
2.3.17
CONTNOTES
Function:
Specifies continuation notes at the end points on drawings for when the drawing continues onto another isometric (as opposed to when the drawing continues onto another sheet of the same isometric). The note can include the name of the continuation pipe, drawing, or both, as defined by the SPOOLER module. If the termination point on the current isometric is a weld, you can include a description of the connecting component or tube in the notes.
Description:
2:27
12.0

Examples:
CONTN PI
Continuation notes show pipe names only.
CONTN BO DESC ON
Continuation notes show both pipe and drawing names, and will include descriptions for welds of the connecting component. Command Syntax:
>- CONTNotes -+-- PIpe --. | | |-- DRwg --| | | -- BOth --+- DESCriptions -+-- ON ---. | | | | -- OFF --| | | --------------------------+-->
2.3.18
CONTWELDS
Allows you to plot welds on the current isometric that are to belong to another drawing. When an isometric continues onto another sheet and the connecting item is a weld, you can use the CONTWELDS command to plot that weld on the current isometric. When plotted on the current isometric, the continuing weld will be given a letter identifier instead of a number identifier. This tells you that the weld actually belongs to another drawing.
Examples: Command Syntax:
CONTW ON
Switches continuation notes for welds on.
>---CONTWelds---+--ON---. | | --OFF--+--->
2.3.19
COORDINATES or COORDS
Specifies the drawing locations at which spatial coordinates are to be shown. Spatial coordinates are shown on the drawing, by default, at all pipe termination or connection points. You can stop coordinates being plotted at specified types of location on the isometric.
2:28
12.0

Examples:
COORDS OFF
No end coordinates will be shown.
COORDS ON COORDS DEFAULT

All end coordinates will be shown.
COORDS ON AT PIPE NOZZ VENT

End coordinates will be shown only at pipe continuations, Nozzle connections and Vents.
COORDS ON AT MISCELLANEOUS
End coordinates will only be shown at end locations which are not any of the following: Pipe, Nozzle, Open, Clos, Vent or Dran. For example, coordinates will be shown at an unconnected flange.
COORDS OFF AT VENT DRAN CLOS

Suppresses coordinates at the specified types of component. Coordinates will be plotted at all other types of pipe termination or connection. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
>--+-- COORdinates --. | | -- COORDS --------+-- ON ---. .-----------------. | | / | |-- OFF --+-- AT --*-- PIPE -----------| | | | | | | |-- NOZZle ---------| | | | | | | |-- OPEN -----------| | | | | | | |-- CLOSe ----------| | | | | | | |-- VENT -----------| | | | | | | |-- DRAN -----------| | | | | | | -- MISCellaneous --| | | | | ----------------------------| | | -- DEFault ---------------------------+-->
ELEVATIONS
Querying:
Q COORdinates Q COORDS Q OPTions
2:29
12.0

2.3.20
CUTBACK
Function:
To ensure there is sufficient length between a pulled bend and the end of the pipe to be gripped by the bending machine and that a pipe with a threaded end is long enough to be gripped by the threading, machine. This command adds length to a cut pipe, where necessary, that will be cut back after the fabrication work is finished. Additional length will be added to cut pipes where either: The length between a pulled bend and the end of the pipe is insufficient to allow the bending machine to grip the pipe. The length of a pipe that is to have a threaded end is insufficient to be gripped by the threading machine. The software checks the distance between the p-arrive or pleave of the pulled bend and the start or end of the pipe (or the length of the pipe to be threaded). If this is found to be less than the minimum grip length, the length of pipe required to give this length is added to the total length of the cut pipe. Note: If two adjacent bends are closer than the minimum grip length then a warning message is written into the message file. The ATEXTs 186 (CUT START) and 187 (CUT END) are output to the remarks column of the Cutting List on the isometric, or to the Special Req. column of the Cut Pipe List File, when appropriate. The minimum grip length required to handle these pipes successfully depends on a number of factors, such as: bore size; pipe material; type of machine; etc. To handle these varying factors PDMS rules are used.
Description:
2:30
12.0

Examples:
CUTBack 150 ON ALL BEND WITH (SPREF EQ/ name)

This associates the minimum grip length with catalogue data.
CUTB 2 INCH ON ALL BENDS WITH (ABOR GE 100 AND ABOR LT 200)
This sets a minimum grip length of 2 inches for all bends in pipes with bores between 100 and 200mm.
CUTB 200 ON ALL BEND

This syntax can be used as the last rule or a catch all to ensure that all bends have at least a 200mm grip length. Note: At a bend ISODRAFT will use the first rule it finds for which the expression is TRUE, therefore the order of the rules is important.
CUTBack 175 ON THREAD

This ensures that any cut pipe with a threaded end is always at least 175mm in length. Command Syntax:
>- CUTBack -+- value - ON -+- ALL BEND -+- WITH - (logical expression) -. | | | | | | -------------------------------| | | | | - THREADedends -----------------------------| | | - NONE* ---------------------------------------------------+->
value is the minimum grip length. It may be input in mm or inches. logical expression may be any logical PML expression, from the PML 1 Expression Handler. For more details refer to expressions in the on-line help. This syntax may be used repeatedly to build up an unlimited number of rules. Querying:
Q CUTBack
Outputs a list of defined cutback rules or none if no rules are defined.
Q CUTBack RULE COUNT

Outputs the number of cutbac rules that have been defined.
QCUTBack RULE <int>

Outputs the rule identified by the <int> number.
2:31
12.0

2.3.21
CUTMARKS
Draws cut marks at each corner of the overall sheet area. The CUTMARKS command draws right-angled cut marks at each corner of the overall sheet area.. When multiple plots are defined on the same drawing sheet, cutting marks will be superimposed. The default is CUTMARKS OFF
Cut Marks
Cut Marks
Figure 2:1.
The location of cutting marks
Figure 2:2.
Cutting marks on multiple plots
CUTMarks ON CUTMarks OFF

>--- CUTMarks ---+--- ON -----. | | --- OFF* ---+--->
Querying:
Q CUTMARKS Q OPTIONS
2:32
12.0

2.3.22
CUTPIPELISTFILE
Outputs a cut pipe list to a file. A cut pipe report can be output as a comma separated value (*.csv) file. The information normally output for a pipe is: Itemcode Item description and specification Bore Cut length Calculated length (ignoring end preparation allowances etc.) Special requirements (e.g. pulled bends, loose flanges, etc.) Cut piece number Pipeline reference Batch reference, i.e. the Zone name. End preparations Spool number
The dimensional units and date format used in the report can be defined by using the UNITS and DATE commands. The format of the report file can also be customised to show only the information you wish to see. This is done by defining a format file, in comma separated value (*.csv) format, which reads in the report file and lays it out to your specification. The format file must contain the following information: Flags to retain .csv file, create formatted report, create appware macro Flags to include Fortran carriage controls, paging, date File header File footer Page length Order of requested columns Column titles Column widths Columns spacing
The format files can only be created using the appware by specifying the layout in the isometric option files.
2:33
12.0

Examples:
CUTPipelistfile /PIPELIST
This writes the list of cut pipes into a file named PIPELIST, using the standard format.
CUTP /FILE1 OVER

Writes the cut pipe list to a file named FILE1, overwriting the existing contents of FILE1. CUTP OFF Cut pipe reports are not produced. This is the default.
CUTP /FILE4 OVER FORMATfilename /FORMAT1

Writes the cut pipe report to a file named FILE4 using the formatting information from file FORMAT1. Command Syntax:
>- CUTPipelistfile -+- filename -+- OVERwrite --. | | | | --------------+- FORMATfilename - name -. | | | | -------------------------| | | |- OFF* ----------------------------------------------| | | -----------------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q CUTPIPELISTFILE Q OPTIONS
2:34
12.0

2.3.23
CUTTINGLIST
Adds a list of cut pipe lengths to the material list. The CUTTINGLIST command adds a list of cut pipe lengths to the material list. Each separate pipe length is always identified by: Its cut piece number, enclosed in angled brackets; e.g. <1>. The pipe bore. The cut length in mm (e.g. 2219) or feet and inches (e.g. 72.5/8) depending on the type of units selected (see the UNITS command).
For pulled bends, the length measured around the centre line of the tube will be included on the cutting list. The RADI attribute of the bend must be set. A length which includes either a loose flange or a field-fit weld will have a fitting allowance incorporated into the plotted length (see the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command). Any special requirements, such as a pulled bend; loose flange; a field-fit weld or cutback allowance, this will be highlighted in the remarks column. Item code for that pipe. The end preparations for the pipe, according to the following list: PE Plain BE Bevelled TH Threaded SC Screwed SA Saddled end Note: These codes are Atexts which can be changed. Note: Where a pipeline is split over more than one drawing, the cut pipe list on each drawing contains only the pipe lengths for that sheet. The default is that the numbering will follow on from the last number on the preceding drawing. The cut piece numbering sequence can be restarted from 1 on each continuation drawing by giving the command CUTTinglist PERDrawing.
Additionally you can add the following items to the table
2:35
12.0

Examples:
CUTTinglist ON ITEM OFF

This outputs the cut piece list in the material table and switches the Item Codes OFF.
CUTT PERD ON
This sets the numbering to per drawing.
CUTT OFF
This switches the Cuttinglist off, but does not delete the current settings.
CUTT ON
This switches the cutting list output ON, using the current settings. (Note that the default is Off.)
CUTT ON PERD ON ITEM ON ENDP ON

This outputs the cut piece list in the material table with both the Item Code and End Preparation columns displayed, with numbering set to per drawing. Command Syntax:
>- CUTTinglist -+- OFF* -+------------------------------------. | | | +- ON ---| | | | .------------<------------. | | |/ | | --------*- PERDrawing ------+- ON --+ | | | | | | - OFF -+ | | | | |- ITEMcodes -------+- ON --+ | | | | | | - OFF -+ | | | | |- ENDpreparations -+- ON --+ | | | | | | - OFF -' | | | -------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q CUTTinglist Q OPTions
2.3.24
DATE
Specifies the format for showing the date in the drawings title block. By default, the date is plotted according to the UK convention. This can be changed to the European or American format, or switched off completely. DATE UK DATE EUR DATE USA Gives the United Kingdom format:18 OCT 1991 Gives the European format:18/10/1991 Gives the United States format:10/18/1991
Examples:
2:36
12.0

DATE OFF Command Syntax:
Switches the date off.
>--- DATE ---+--- UK* ----. | | |--- EUR ----| | | |--- USA ----| | | |--- OFF ----| | | ------------+--->
Querying:
Q DATE Q OPTions
2.3.25
DELETE
Function: Description: Examples:
Deletes an SKEY definition from a symbol library. There are two forms of the command, depending on whether the SKEY is a standard one or a user-defined one.
DELEte OLDKey keyname

Deletes a standard SKEY definition.
DELEte NEWKey keyname

Deletes a user-defined SKEY definition. Related Commands: Command Syntax: SKEY
>--- DELEte ---+--- OLDKey keyname ---. | | --- NEWKey keyname ---+--->
2.3.26
DELIMITER
Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises as the itemcode suffix delimiter. Identical components can be distinguished by having a suffix added to their SPREFs. ISODRAFT normally removes suffixes from itemcodes in the material list by recognising the delimiter character which separates the suffix from the rest of the SPREF. The default suffix code delimiter is the colon (:). A component with an SPREF of /A1A/TEE.50X50:X will normally appear on the material list with the itemcode TEE.50X50. (Note that the specification name /A1A/ is also removed automatically.)
Examples:
DELIMITER AT
Specifies
symbol.
2:37
12.0

DELIMITER COLON DELIMITER PLUS DELIMITER DOT DELIMITER AND Command Syntax:
Specifies Specifies Specifies Specifies
: + . &
symbol. symbol. symbol. symbol.
>--- DELImiter ---+--| |--| |--| |--| ---
ATsymbol -------. | COLONsymbol* ---| | PLUSsymbol -----| | DOTsymbol ------| | ANDsymbol ------+--->
Querying:
Q DELImiter Q OPTions
2.3.27
DETAIL
Generates and plots isometric drawings and material lists. The DETAIL command followed by one or more element identifiers processes the elements given, and produces the isometric drawings and any other reports requested. The default hierarchy level for plotting on a single isometric drawing is: a Pipe from the DESIGN database or a spool drawing from the Fabrication database. Branches or spools/ fields can be plotted individually and system isometrics, from a higher level in the database, can also be output. More than one pipe or spool drawing can be specified in a single DETAIL command. The pipes can be specified individually, as a high-level element or group, or as members of the Detail List (see the ADD and REMOVE commands). If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, the split points and spool identifiers can be stored in the DESIGN database. In this case, individual sheets and spools can be added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY command. Note that if MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute of a pipe is set to TRUE when it is detailed, ISODRAFT will not detail the pipe again unless MARK IGNORE ON has been specified.
2:38
12.0

System Isometrics Normally, ISODRAFT processes each pipeline or spool drawing separately. Pipes, or spool drawings, which are connected can be detailed as a complete, named, system isometric. For example:
DETAIL
CE
AS
System Name
Note: You cannot mix DESIGN and Fabrication database elements in the same system isometric. The system name is plotted, by default, in the pipeline reference box in the bottom right-hand corner of the drawing. The individual pipe names, along with their material and other specifications, are plotted at the change point. If any specification is unchanged throughout the system, it will be output in the title block in the same way as a normal isometric. If a system consists of only one pipe, its name will be added to the title block. The material control file and material list will be produced for the whole system isometric. It is not possible to produce a breakdown of materials for an individual pipeline, nor will the material files include any pipeline header information. Note: No information is written to the support file for a system isometric. Equipment Trims Although unconnected items cannot be drawn automatically as part of a system isometric, vessel or equipment trim drawings comprising a drawing frame, user-positioned text and a material list can be produced for material take off using the DETAIL AS EQUIPMENT option. The graphical part of the drawing can then be added separately, e.g. as an underlay plot generated in DRAFT. Groups of components such as blanking flanges, level gauges, relief valves, etc., can be modelled on the basis of one Pipe per Nozzle, or per group of Nozzles if connected (such as a level gauge piped between two Nozzles). Disconnected branches in the same pipe on different nozzles cannot be grouped. The collection of pipes can then be detailed as equipment trim. In the material list, equipment trim items will be grouped under headings of the form
NOZZLE REF - A.
2:39
12.0

By default, item numbering for equipment trims in the material list will start at 1 for each Nozzle. To concatenate the lists so that the numbering is continuous throughout the sequence of Nozzles, use the EQUIPMENTNUMBERING command. A split ATTA (that is, an ATTY set to SSSS) positioned at the Tail of an equipment trim Branch will cause a multiple sheet drawing to be produced. Such an ATTA should be positioned so that the split comes between two Nozzle groupings. It is not possible to obtain a cut pipe list on an equipment trim isometric. Cut pipe lists have pointers to individual lengths on the drawing and so, since equipment trim isometrics are for material take off only (with no drawing), a cut pipe list would not be meaningful. Examples:
DETAIL /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1

Plots named elements only.
DETAIL ALL
Plots the current Detail List.
DETAIL /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS REFINER

Plots the two sites as a single system iso with the drawing title REFINER.
DETAIL SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2

Replots sheet 2 of PIPE-2. Note that if a dimension is continued on another sheet, the other sheet will be replotted as well, so that the dimensioning information is correct.
DETAIL SHEETN SING /PIPE2

Replots the iso for /PIPE-2 on a single sheet
DETAIL /SPLDRG-2
Plots spool drawing 2 of the Fabrication database. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
/ >- DETail -*| || || | | .--------------------------------------------. | <gid> --------------------------------------| | ALL ----------------------------------------| | SHEETNumber -+- integer -. | | | | - SINGle --+-------. | | | SPOOl -+- integer -+-OF integer -| | | | | | | --------------| | | | | - text -------------------+- <gid> -+- AS -- text ------. | | | ---------+- EQUIpment text --+->
ADD
CHECK
REMOVE
SPOOLNUMBERS
2:40
12.0

Note: The Spool branch in this syntax diagram refers only to spools from the DESIGN database, not Spool Drawings from the SPOOLER module, which you plot using the normal DETAIL command. Restrictions: The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in a DETAIL command is 100. A maximum of 20 DETAIL commands are allowed for a single pipe (sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only add sheet and spools for a Pipe which has previously been detailed with Repeatability on, so that split points and spool identifiers have been stored in the DESIGN database. See the REPEATABILITY command. Normal pipes can be detailed alongside replots. Querying: Q DEtaillist Shows the current content of the Draw List.
2.3.28
DIMDIST
Function:
Specifies distance between dimensioning lines and pipe/ component centrelines on the isometric plot (standout distance). Normally used to avoid overplotting lines on a complex isometric. The default standout distances are: string dimensions 11mm; overall dimensions 16mm; support dimensions 6mm. Note that these standout values may not be set to the same value. Also note that the skewbox standout distances for dimension lines cannot be set to these values and vice versa.
Description:
Examples:
DIMDIST STRING 15
Sets standout distance for string/composite dimensions to 15mm.
DIMDIST STRING 0.5 INCH

Sets standout distance to 0.5 inch.
DIMDIST SUPPORTS 10
Sets support dimensioning standout distance to 10mm.
DIMDIST OVERALL 12
Sets overall dimensioning standout distance to 12mm Related Commands: DIMENSIONS SUPPORT SKEWBOX
2:41
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- DIMDist ---+--- STRING* ----. | | |--- OVERall ---| | | --- SUPPorts ---+--- value -----. | | --- DEFAULT ---+--->
where value is the standout distance. Querying: Q DIMDist Q OPTions
2:42
12.0

2.3.29
DIMENSIONS
Specifies dimensioning style. The basic options for detailed dimensioning are either string or composite dimensions. String dimensioning gives the maximum amount of detail, since it shows both the lengths of individual components and their relative positions. For assembly purposes (fabrication and erection) string dimensioning often gives more detail than is strictly necessary and composite dimensioning can be specified. String dimensions, which are plotted by default, are measured sequentially from each relevant point to the next. The relevant points are: The start or end of a branch. Changes of direction (bends, elbows, etc).
Component connection points (flanges, welds, screwed and compression joints etc, excluding gaskets). Composite dimensions ignore dimensions over which the fabricator has no control, particularly the sizes of individual components. Components which are directly connected to the each other are therefore dimensioned as though they constitute a single composite item. Only non-flanged components, that is, those with welded, screwed or compression fittings, are considered as connected when calculating composite dimensions. Flanges are always treated as breaks in the pipeline and dimensioned separately. Fittings which are attached to pipe only at one end are treated as composite with the fitting at the other end. Fittings which are attached to pipe at both ends are dimensioned to the arrive ppoint, with two exceptions: Reducers are dimensioned to the larger end; Tees are dimensioned to the centreline of the off branch.
Composite dimensions are always broken at a Tee or Olet intersection point. You can display overall dimensions in addition to string or composite dimensions. The default standout for overall dimensions is 16mm. Overall dimensions are taken: From the start of a branch to the first change of direction From each change of direction to the next From the last change of direction to the end of a branch From the start of a falling section skew-box to the end of the skew-box. Between Branch connections.
2:43
12.0

~
(a) String dimensions
~
(b) Composite dimensions
~
(c) Overall dimensions
Figure 2:3.
Dimensioning Methods
Bore sizes will be marked where any confusion might otherwise arise; e.g. at reducers, reducing fittings, tees, crosses, etc. You can also specify: Whether or connections; not overall dimensions cross Branch
Dimensioning to Valve centrelines.
By default, support/hanger dimensions are on the same side as string dimensions, but they can be on the opposite side. The default standout for support/hanger dimensions is 6mm. The default settings are: String dimensioning dimensioning off); on (and, therefore, composite
Overall dimensioning off; Support dimensioning on; Valve centreline dimensioning off;
Support/hanger dimensions shown alongside other pipeline dimensions.
2:44
12.0

Examples:
DIME ON
Produces isometrics which are fully annotated in string format, with both piping and support dimensions. This is the default setting.
DIME OFF
Produces isometrics with no dimensions plotted.
DIME COMP ON
Produces isometrics with composite dimensions over connected fittings.
DIME COMP OFF

Produces isometrics with string format dimensions, assuming that dimensioning is still on.
DIME OVER ON
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions on (independent of current setting of string/composite options).
DIME OVER CEN

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to Valve centrelines and Branch connections (in addition to string dimensions).
DIME OVER CENT ONLY

Produces isometrics with overall centreline dimensions only.
DIME OVER ON STOP

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions stopping at branch connections.
DIME OVER ON ACR

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions across branch connections.
DIME OVER CENT STOP

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valve centrelines, stopping at branch connections.
DIME OVER CENT ACR

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valve centrelines and across branch connections.
DIME OVER CRIT

Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to critical components.
DIME SUPP
Produces isometrics with support dimensions only.
DIME DEFAULT
Resets the dimensioning style to its default state.
2:45
12.0

Note: That standout distances may not be set to the same value. Related Commands: Restrictions: DIMDIST SUPPORT TRUNCATE Overall dimensioning can be specified in addition to string or composite dimensioning, but an overall dimension will not be shown if it is the same as a string or composite dimension. Instruments Tees cannot be included within overall dimensions. When a Tee or Olet is encountered with its arrive p-point in a branch leg, an overall dimension may not be given for the main branch. Command Syntax:
>- DIMEnsions -+| || || || || | | || | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ON -----------------------------------------------------------. | OFF ----------------------------------------------------------| | SUPport ------------------------------------------------------| | DEFault ------------------------------------------------------| | COMPosite -+- ON --. | | | | - OFF -+------------------------------------------| | OVERall -+- ON ------------------. | | | | |- CENTreline -+- ONLY -| | | | | | | --------+- STOPping -. | | | | | | |- ACRoss ---| | | | | | | ------------+- BRANch ------| | | | | |- CONNections -| | | | | ---------------| | | |- CRITical -+- ONLY -. | | | | | | --------+------------------------------| | | - OFF ----------------------------------------------| | HANGers -+- OPPosite --. | | | | - ALONgside -+- STRings ---------------------------+>
Querying:
Q DIMEnsions Q OPTions
2:46
12.0

2.3.30
DISTANCES
Allows you to specify the units to be used for input of lengths and distances. The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units which are assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) are normally derived from the Catalogue. You can change the default units independently for input of pipe bores and/or distances along pipelines or across components by using the related DISTANCES and BORES commands. Note: That the UNITS command is used to set output units. The current default units may be overridden for any specific item of input data by giving the units explicitly. For example: 5mm.
Examples:
MM DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in mm unless otherwise specified.
INCH DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in inches unless otherwise specified.
FINCH DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in feet and inches unless otherwise specified (e.g. 56 represents 5ft 6in). Related Commands: Command Syntax: BORES
>---+--| |--| |--| --MILlimetre ---. | MM -----------| | FInch --------| | INch ---------+--- BOres -------. | | --- DIstances ---+--->
Querying:
Q UNIts
2:47
12.0

2.3.31
DTEXTS
Controls the material description part of item descriptions A complete item description in a material list consists of the geometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXT element) and the material description (derived from the attributes of an MTEXT element). The text in MTEXT and DTEXT elements is defined in PARAGON by setting the attributes of MTEXT and DTEXT to the text required. Both elements have three attributes which can contain text: The three attributes of DTEXT are RTEXT, STEXT and TTEXT; The three attributes of MTEXT are XTEXT, YTEXT and ZTEXT.
The default attributes whose text will be displayed on the material list are RTEXT and XTEXT. If the other attributes have been set in the DESIGN database, you can choose to display the STEXT or TTEXT using the DTEXT command, and the YTEXT or ZTEXT using the MTEXT command. The DTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress the geometric description completely. Using different attributes can be used, for example, to store descriptions in different languages. Examples:
DTEXts Stext
Sets the description to the text held in the STEXT attribute.
DTEXts Ttext
Sets the description to the text held in the TTEXT attribute.
DTEXts Rtext
Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute. This is the default. Related Commands: Command Syntax: MATERIALLIST MTEXTS
>--- DTEXts ---+--| |--| |--| --Rtext* ---. | Stext ----| | Ttext ----| | IGNORE ---+--->
Querying:
Q DTEXT Q OPTions
2:48
12.0

2.3.32
ELEVATION
Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to be shown on isometrics. By default, elevations are shown on isometrics at all intersection points where there is a change of elevation. You can change this as shown in the following examples.
Examples:
ELEVation VERTIcal
Outputs elevations only on vertical sections of pipe (i.e. linear dimensions are omitted).
ELEVation VERTical AND DIMEnsions

Outputs both elevations and dimensions on vertical sections of pipe.
ELEVation INTERsections
Resets the default condition so that elevations are only shown at intersection points where there is a change of elevation, and dimensions are shown on vertical sections of Pipe. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
>-- ELEVation --+-- INTERsections* ----------------------------. | | -- VERTical ------+-- AND --. | | | | |---------+-- DIMEnsions --| | | ----------------------------+-->
COORDINATES
COORDS
DIMENSIONS
Querying:
Q ELEVation Q OPTions
2.3.33
EQUIPMENTNUMBERING
Controls numbering of items in the material list for an equipment trim isometric. Item numbering in the material list can start at 1 for each Nozzle, which is the default, or the numbering can be sequential for all Nozzles.
2:49
12.0

Examples:
EQUIPMENTN LIST
Numbering is continuous through the sequence of Nozzles.
EQUIPMENTN NOZZ
Resets to the default, with each Nozzle having its own separate numbering sequence. Command Syntax:
>--- EQUIPMENTNumbering ---+--- NOZZle* ---. | | --- LIST ------+--->
Querying:
Q EQUIPMENTNumbering
(note minimum abbreviation for querying)
Q OPTions
2.3.34
FALLINGLINES
Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipeline before it is shown as a skew on the isometric plot. Amounts of fall less than the current fall limit are shown by a wedge-shaped symbol on the pipe, together with a note giving the rate of fall. The wedge-shaped symbols are known as fall arrows. Amounts of fall greater than the current limit are shown as boxed skews. You can change the limit, and the units in which it is expressed.
2:50
12.0

EL +25000 EL +1130
FALL 1_
EL +1200
EL +24600 Falling line shown as skew

Figure 2:4. Different ways of showing falling lines.
Falling line shown by fall arrow
The default accuracy to which ISODRAFT will report the fall is as follows: Degrees to the nearest half degree Ratio to the nearest 1 up to 30; to the nearest 5 above 30 Percentage to the nearest 1% Grads to the nearest half grad Metric inclination to the nearest 10mm per metre Imperial inclination to the nearest 1/16 per foot
Note: That if the slope is less than 1:500 (or its equivalent in degrees, etc) the fall note will not be output. You can specify different accuracy values for reporting the fall using the ACCURACYLEVEL value command (where value can be zero, 1 or 2). The accuracies you can specify are:
value (for each representation) degrees ratio percentage grads metric imperial
0 default default default default default default
1 0.1 1 always 0.1 0.1 1mm/m

1/ /10 16
2 0.01 1 always 0.01 0.01 0.1mm/m

1/ /100 16
2:51
12.0

If you set an accuracy level and then wish to go back to the default settings, you must give an appropriate ACCURACYLEVEL command with a value of zero. If the fall units are specified but the value of the fall limit is omitted, the following default values will be used. These correspond to approximately the same slope: FALL DEG FALL RAT FALL PER FALL GRA FALL MET FALL IMP will default to will default to will default to will default to will default to will default to FALL DEG 5 FALL RAT 11 FALL PER 9 FALL GRA 5 FALL MET 80 FALL IMP 1 i.e. 5 degrees i.e. a ratio of 1:11 i.e. a slope of 9% i.e. 5 grads i.e. 80mm metre per
i.e. 1/16 inch per foot
The overall default setting, if no fall units or limit are specified, is FALL DEG 5. Where a falling section includes an in-line component, such as a Valve or Reducer, the FALL message will appear only once, against the first section of the slope. Where a falling section incorporates a Tee, the FALL message will be shown twice, on both sides of the Tee.
3 X 3" NS EL +1200 3 X 3" NS EL +1163

FALL 1_ FALL 1_
2010 EL +1130 203 1093 600
Figure 2:5.
Falls in sections of pipe containing components.
Examples:
FALL RATIO 20 FALL RATIO
Sets fall limit to 1:20 Resets fall limit to ratio default of 1:11.
2:52
12.0

FALL PERCENT 2 FALL PERCENT FALL OFF FALL 1.4 DEG FALL RAT 1:40 FALL 2.7% FALL 1.6 PER GRAD
Sets fall limit to 2%. Resets fall limit to percentage default of 9%. All falls shown as boxed skews; fall symbol not used at all. Sets fall limit to 1.5 degrees. Sets fall limit to 1:40. Sets fall limit to 3% (to nearest per cent). Sets fall limit to 1.5 grad. Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/m. Sets fall limit to an imperial incline of 5/16 per ft. Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/m with a reporting accuracy of 1mm per metre. FALLSKEWS SKEWBOX
FALL MET 30 FALL IMP 5/16
FALL MET 30 ACC 1 Related Commands: Command Syntax:

>- FALLinglines -+| || || || || || | | | | -
ANGLEACCURACY ZEROLENGTHSKEWS
DEG --------. | RATio ------| | PERcentage -| | GRAds ------| | IMPerial ---| | METric -----+- value --. | | | |- ACCuracylevel value -. | | | ----------+-----------------------| | OFF -------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q FALLinglines Q OPTions
2:53
12.0

2.3.35
FALLSKEWS
Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed and falling pipelines are shown. Dimensioning boxes for skewed and falling pipelines are by default shown by 3D skewboxes, that is boxes showing the horizontal skew and the fall. Skewed and falling pipelines with rates of fall less than the current fall (set by the FALLINGLINES command) can be shown as a 2D skewbox for the horizontal skew and a fall indicator showing the amount of fall. Skewboxes can be suppressed completely for branches containing less than a specified number of components. Skew box suppres-sion applies only until a change of direction is encountered.
Examples:
FALLSkews THREEDbox ON
Displays skewed and falling lines with 3D boxes. This is the default.
FALLSkews TWODbox ON
Displays skewed and falling lines with 2D boxes for the horizontal skew and a FALL indicator giving the amount of fall.
FALLSkews TWODbox OFF 4

Displays skews as 2D boxes (with FALL indicators), but omits boxes on branch legs which have four or less components. Note: This component count excludes gaskets but includes each length of implied tubing. The number of components must be between 1 and 50 inclusive. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
>--- FALLSkews ---+--- THREEDbox ---. | | --- TWODbox -----+--- ON --------------. | | |--- OFF --- value ---| | | ---------------------+--->
FALLINGLINES OVERALLSKEWS SKEWBOX ZEROLENGTHSKEWS
2:54
12.0

2.3.36
FILE
Function:
Specifies the name of a PLOT file to which ISODRAFTs isometric drawing output is to be sent. The FILE command can also be used to output a file in dxf format (if you needed to transfer the plot to another program, for example). If Kanji output is required, the FILE command also allows you to specify the dxf file as SHIFTJIS format (mostly used on IBM PCs) or EUC format (used on most other machines). You can produce dxf files either instead of the PLOT file, or as well as the PLOT file. Details of outputting .dxf format files to MicroStation are given in Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation.
Description:
The FILE command specifies the name of the PLOT file for ISODRAFT output. ISODRAFT adds a three-digit number, jumping over any numbers which already exist. If DXF output is requested, the suffix .dxf will be added after the number. Note that the numbering ignores the .dxf suffix. For example, if a file named /PLOT001 exists, the next file created will be /PLOT002 or /PLOT002.dxf. If the same file command is used to produce a PLOT file and DXF file, they will both have the same numeric suffix. For example, if the last PLOT file was /PLOT004 and the last DXF file was /PLOT002.dxf, and a PLOT file and DXF file are both required for the next DETAIL command, the output will be / PLOT005 and /PLOT005.dxf. By default, each DETAIL command will produce one PLOT file. If several pipes are specified in a DETAIL command, you can specify that each plot will be in a separate file. If a pipe is too complicated to be shown on one plot, or if you have specified that the pipe should be split over more than one sheet, separate PLOT files can be produced. If you want the PLOT file to contain more than one drawing you can specify a multiple PLOT file, and in this case you can also specify the length of paper available. ISODRAFT will automatically create a new multiple PLOT file when the paper length has been exceeded. The PDMS limitation on plotting size is 3275mm square and this cannot be exceeded in either single or multiple file mode.
2:55
12.0

Examples:
FILE /P250-BDF
Specifies the filename /P250-BDF. PLOT files will be named /P250-BDF001, /P250-BDF002, etc.
FILE AND DXF /P250-BDF

Specifies the filename /P250-BDF for both the PLOT file and the dxf file.
FILE DXF EUC /P250-BDF

Specifies that the PLOT file will be in DXF EUC format. The suffix .dxf is added to the filename automatically. Note that on VAX, this will override the normal VAX filename extension.
FILE /PLOT MULT

Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multiple plots. This is the default.
FILE /PLOT MULT 2000

Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multiple plots, and gives the maximum length of paper. Command Syntax:
>- FILE -+- AND -. | | +-------+- DXF -. | | | | '-------+- SHIFTjis -. | | | | +- EUC ------| | | | | ------------| | | ----------------------------+- filename -+- SINGle -------------. | | |-- MULTIple -+- value -| | | | | ---------| | | | | -----------------------+->
where value is the maximum length of the plotters paper roll in millimetres. Querying: Q OUTPUT Q OPTIONS
2:56
12.0

2.3.37
FLOWARROWS
Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots. Flow arrows are normally shown for inline components. Inline flow arrows can also be plotted in any length of tube if an attachment point (ATTA) with its ATTY attribute set to FLOW has been created in the DESIGN module. You can also instruct ISODRAFT to include automatic flow arrows by using the AUTOMATIC command. Automatic flow arrows are output for each branch, and at each multi-way component, provided that a length of implied tube is available to take the arrow. The automatic flow arrows option will also output any FLOW ATTAs. By default, the inline flow arrow option is set to off, so that flow arrows for tube are not normally shown. Each type can be plotted independently, and the inline flow arrows can be scaled. By default the arrows point in the direction HEAD to TAIL; i.e. FORWARD. They can be reversed by changing the branch FLOW attribute to BACKWARD.
Examples:
FLOWarrows ON
Flow arrows will be plotted for components.
FLOWarrows OFF
Flow arrows will not be plotted for components.
FLOWarrows INline ON
Flow arrows will be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.
FLOWarrows INline OFF

Flow arrows will not be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.
FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10

Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10. The default scale factor is 8. The scale must be an integer between 5 and 15 inclusive.
FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10 AUTO

Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10 and added automatically. The default scale factor is 8. The scale must be an integer between 5 and 15 inclusive. Command Syntax:
2:57
12.0

.---------------------<----------------------. / | >- FLOWarrows --+------------+-- ON* --------------------------| | | | | -- OFF --------------------------| | | -- INline --+-- ON ------------. | | | | |-- SCAle-integer--+- AUTOmatic --| | | | | --------------| | | -- OFF* -------------------------+-->
Querying:
Q FLOWarrows Q OPTions
2.3.38
FRAME
Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and text are to be drawn. By default, ISODRAFT plots a frame around the complete drawing within the predefined margins, together with separating lines between the different areas. Frame text and line summary symbols are also plotted. The FRAME command allows you to switch these features off or on.
CUTMARKS
MARGIN
>--- FRAMe ---+--- ON* ---. | | --- OFF ---+--->
Querying:
Q FRAMe Q OPTions
2.3.39
INSTALL SETUP
Produces the screen layout stored in a file created by the RECREATE command. On workstations, you can use the RECREATE command to save the screen layout, which can then be read in again using the INSTALL SETUP command.
2:58
12.0

Examples:
RECReate /DISP
Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.
INSTALL SETUP /DISP

Restores the screen display stored in the file /DISP. Related Commands: Command Syntax: RECREATE
>--- INSTALL SETUP filename --->
2.3.40
INSTNAME
Function:
Controls two options relating to the display of Instruments: Defines whether SPREFs or PDMS names are to be used as itemcodes for instruments in the material list. Allows you to identify instruments on the isometric plot by tagging them with their names enclosed in circles (balloons).
Description:
By default, an instrument is identified in the material list by having its SPREF as its itemcode. You can specify instead that the instruments name will be appended to its description, because an instrument reference may require more characters than the itemcode format permits. In this case the itemcode column will be left blank. When an instrument is referenced by name, the name can be displayed in a circular balloon next to the plotted symbol on the isometric. By default, instruments are not tagged with their names in balloons, even if they are identified by name in the material list. The size of the balloon is given by specifying the maximum number of characters per line of text in the balloon.
Examples:
INSTN NAME
Instruments identified in material list by names appended to descriptions. The itemcode column is left blank (default).
INSTN SPREF
Instruments identified in material list by using SPREFs as itemcodes.
INSTN NAME WITH BALL OFF

Instruments identified in material list by name, but without tagging with name balloons on plot.
INSTN NAME WITH BALLOONS SIZE 4

Identifies all instrument symbols on the isometric with balloons containing the instrument names in a 4characters-per-line format.
2:59
12.0

TAGGING
>- INSTName -+- NAMe* -+- WITH -. | | | | |--------+- BALLoons -+- SIZE - integerv-. | | | | | | - OFF ------------| | | | | ----------------------------------------| | | - SPRef ------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q INSTNAME Q OPTions
2.3.41
INSULATIONCONTROL
Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted. Any piping component which has its ISPEC attribute set may be shown insulated. The start and end points of insulated components will be shown on the isometric. Insulation and tracing can be shown: On tubing only On tubing and pipe components
The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will be shown in the title block. Examples: INSU ON INSU TUBE INSU ALL INSU OFF Display insulation. Show insulation on the tube only, not on the pipe components. Show insulation components. on both tube and
Suppress the display of insulation.
The default is INSULATIONCONTROL TUBE. Related Commands: TRACINGCONTROL
2:60
12.0

Command Syntax:
>------ INSUlationcontrol ----+---| |---| |---| ----
ON* ----. | TUBE ---| | ALL ----| | OFF ----+--->
Querying:
Q INSUlationcontrol Q OPTions
2.3.42
ISO
Defines the view direction to be used for generating the isometric plot. The ISO command defines which of the four standard isometric viewing directions will be used for the isometric plot. An arrow is placed on the plot to show north. The BOX option will plot a box round the north arrow. The default view direction is ISO 3 (i.e. North at the top left-hand corner of the drawing).
Examples:
ISO 1 ISO 2 ISO 3 * ISO 4 ISO 4 BOX
North at bottom right-hand corner North at top right-hand corner North at top left-hand corner North at bottom left-hand corner North at bottom left-hand corner, with a box round the arrow
Command Syntax:
>--- ISO --- value ---+-----------. | | --- BOX ---+--->
where value is 1, 2, 3 or 4. Querying: Q ISO Q OPTions
2:61
12.0

2.3.43
ISOTYPE
Function: Description
Defines whether the isometric will show fabrication information, erection information, or both. The ISOTYPE command specifies whether the information on the drawing is intended for: In-shop fabrication and on-site erection In-shop fabrication On-site erection In-shop fabrication of pipe spools
A combined fabrication-erection isometric is a fully dimensioned and annotated isometric drawing with a material list specifying all piping components, bolts etc. This is the default. A fabrication-only isometric is similar to the combined format except that the following information is omitted: The coordinates of plant locations Erection materials CONNected TO and CONTinued ON comments at pipeline ends
The erection-only isometric is similar to the combined format except that all fabrication materials, apart from loose flanges, are omitted from the materials list . A spool isometric only shows fabrication information. Loose flanges will be included on spools, with the note tack weld only, if they have a SHOP attribute set to TRUE. ISODRAFT automatically allocates spool break points at flanges or flanged components, field welds and erection materials, that is items with their SHOP flag set to FALSE. All components, including Tube, must have their SHOP attributes set to TRUE if spool break points are to be correctly allocated. (The default setting for tube is FALSE, which would cause lengths of implied tube to be omitted when ISODRAFT calculates spool dimensions.) A spool number, automatically allocated by ISODRAFT, will be plotted after the pipeline reference in the title block of each drawing. For example, 100-A-8 SPL[1].
2:62
12.0

A separate isometric drawing will be produced for each pipe spool. Sheets with Blank Drawing Areas. Any type of the isometric can be produced with the actual drawing area left blank, that is, only the material list will be plotted. If ISOTYPE NONE is specified, no plot will be produced. You must specify output to text files, such as a material list, to get any output at all. Command Syntax:
>-- ISOType --+-- COMBined* --+-- ERECtion ------. | | | | |-- FABrication ---| | | | | ------------------| | | |-- ERECtion --+-- FABrication ----| | | | | -------------------| | | |-- FABrication -------------------| | | |-- SPOOl -------------------------+-- NOPicture ---. | | | | ----------------| | | --- NONe ------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q ISOType Q OPTions
2.3.44
ITEMCODE (1)
Allows you to label certain types of fitting with their itemcodes on the isometric drawing. By default, itemcodes for piping components are shown only in the material list. For in-line fittings of generic types INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP or VENT, you can specify that itemcodes are also shown against the corresponding component symbols on the isometric plot. You can also specify that itemcodes are not to be shown at all.
2:63
12.0

Examples:
ITEM INST TRAP ON

Itemcodes for Instruments and Traps shown against plotted symbols and in material list; codes for all other component types shown in material list only.
ITEM TRAP VENT OFF

Itemcodes for Traps and Vents not shown at all; codes for all other component types shown in material list only.
ITEM ALL ON
Itemcodes for all valid component types shown against plotted symbols and in mate Itemcodes for all types of component shown in material list only.
ITEM OFF
Itemcodes are shown only in the material list. Related Commands: Command Syntax: TAGGING
.--------<--------. / | >--- ITEMcode ---*--- fittingtype --| | | --- ALL ----------+--- ON --------. | | |--- OFF* ------| | | --- DEFault ---+--->
where fittingtype is any of INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, or VENT. Querying: Q ITEMCODE Q OPTions
2:64
12.0

2.3.45
ITEMCODE (2)
Function:
Specifies whether or not specification names are to be included in material list itemcodes, and whether items which have the same itemcode except for the specification name and suffix are treated as the same item. By default, itemcodes shown in the material list do not include the name of the Specification from which the material data has been extracted. This is known as a short itemcode. The ITEMCODE LENGTH command allows you to use the full SPCOM, which includes the SPEC name but excludes the suffix, as the itemcode. By default, ISODRAFT removes any itemcode suffixes before comparing itemcodes for totalling in the material list. The SEPARATE option allows itemcodes to be compared before the specification name and suffix are removed, thus allowing itemcodes to be listed separately with different descriptions. You can set up multiple itemcodes for elements in the DESIGN database by creating user-defined attributes (UDAs) for the SPCOM of the element. For bolts, the UDAs are created as attributes of a DTAB element. You can then use the ITEMCODE command to specify that the itemcode should be taken from a UDA instead of from the SPCOM.
Description:
Examples:
ITEMCODE LENGTH LONG

Itemcodes to include SPEC name.
ITEMCODE LENGTH SHORT

Itemcodes to exclude SPEC name.
ITEMCODE TOTAL
Itemcodes which are the same except for the specification name and suffix are totalled.
ITEMCODE SEPARATE
Itemcodes which are the same except for the specification name and suffix are listed separately.
ITEMCODE FROM :ABC

Itemcodes to be taken from the UDA named :ABC. The UDA must exist for SPCOMs.
ITEMCODE FROM SPREF

Itemcodes to be taken from the SPCOM. Related Commands: Command Syntax: MATERIALLIST DELIMITER
2:65
12.0

>-- ITEMcode --+----------------------. | | -- FROM --+--SPREF* --+- LENGth --+-- LONG ----. | | | | | | -- SHORT* --| | | | | |-- TOTal* ----. | | | | | | |-- SEParate --+---------| | | | | ------------------------| | | -- :udaname ------------------------+-->
Querying:
Q ITEMCODE Q ITEMCODE LENGTH Q OPTions
2.3.46
JOINTNUMBERS
Numbering joints in Spool Drawings on an isometric. By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers for every joint in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can be output on an isometric by switching JOINTNumbers ON. Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics from the DESIGN database. The joints are sequentially numbered from one end of the Spool Drawing, with each number being given a prefix indicating the type of joint. The default prefixes are: F S C Flange Screwed Compression
Note: The F, S & C codes are ATexts, and can be changed. The numbers are displayed in a diamond, with an arrow pointing to the joint. If the total number of characters (prefix + number) is greater than 3, the number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g. <FL124>. Examples:
JOINTN ON JOINTN OFF
Switches joint numbering on Switches joint numbering off. WELDNUMBERS
Related Commands: Syntax Graph:
PBENDNUMBERS
>--- JOINTNumbers ---+--- ON ----. | | --- OFF ---+--->
Querying:
Q JOINTNumbers
2:66
12.0

2.3.47
KEYS
Allows components with specified SKEYS to be treated like instruments. Component types that can be tagged, that is types that can have their names plotted automatically on the isometric drawing, can be treated like instruments. This means that: If INSTRUMENT SPREF is set, the SPREF will be used as the itemcode. If INSTRUMENT NAME is set, the itemcode column will be left blank and the name will be appended to the description.
If INSTRUMENT NAME WITH BALLOONS is set, the name will be output in a balloon on the isometric. The types that can be tagged are:
INST TRAP
VALV VENT
FILTER PCOM TWA VFWA
To treat a component type as an instrument, give each specific component type a key number, and then relate the key number to the symbol key (SKEY) by the KEYS command. See the TAG command for more information about tagging. Examples:
KEYS 1 VVFL
Any valve with the symbol key VVFL, and which has a name, will have its name appended to its description and the itemcode column left blank. If a valve with the symbol key VVFL is not named, its SPREF will be output as its itemcode in the normal way.
KEYS 1
Remove the component from the key number list by quoting its number only. Command Syntax:
>--- KEYS --- keynumber --+--- skey ---. | | --------------+--->
where keynumber is the key number (which must be in the range 1 to 20) and skey is the symbol key (SKEY attribute). Querying: Q OPTIONS Q KEYS Q KEYS keynumber List the key numbers currently set. List the SKEY associated with the number.
2:67
12.0

2.3.48
LEGLENGTH
Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows, tees and crosses. By default, the plotted leg length of Elbows, Tees and Crosses is 9mm. If necessary you can change this value. The minimum leg length allowed is 6mm. If you specify a smaller value than this, ISODRAFT will give the message Leglength set to minimum value of 6mm
Examples: Command Syntax: Querying:
LEGLength 12
>--- LEGLength --- <uval> --->

Q LEGLENGTH Q OPTIONS
2.3.49
LINETHICKNESS
Allows you to control (optionally) the thickness of line used to represent piping. This command allows you to specify a line thickness (from 1 to 10) to represent piping on the isometric. A default value (3) is used if you do not specify a thickness.
Examples:
LINETHICKNESS 8
Specifies a line thickness of 8 to be used to represent piping.
>--- LINEthickness --- <uval> --->

Q LINEthickness Q OPTions
2:68
12.0

2.3.50
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE
Function:
Allows you to specify an additional length of tube on cut tube to compensate for field-fitted welds and loose flanges, where the ALLO attribute has not been set. If a cut pipe list has been specified using the CUTPIPELIST command, ISODRAFT automatically includes a site fitting allowance in each calculated cut pipe length which terminates in: A flange with its LOOSE attribute set to TRUE (i.e. a loose flange) An element of generic type WELD which has the symbol key WF (i.e. a field-fit weld)
Description:
The allowance is taken from the value of the ALLO attribute for the weld or flange, if set. If the value of ALLO is not set (or zero), the allowance defaults to 150mm. The default allowance can be altered using the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command. The fabricator and/or erector can be informed of the in-built allowance by means of a message in the title block area. Note: The dimension shown on the isometric drawing is the actual designed dimension. Examples:
LOOSE 4 INCH
Adds 4 inches to tube length for each field-fitted weld or loose flange with no ALLO value set.
LOOSE 0
No additional tube length added for field-fitted welds or loose flange. Command Syntax: Querying:
>--- LOOSeflangeallowance --- <uval> --->
Q LOOSeflangeallowance Q OPTions
2.3.51
MARGIN
Specifies the width of the margin on each side of the drawing. By default, a 5mm wide blank margin is provided on each side of the drawing area. The MARGIN command allows you to specify the widths of the left, right, top and bottom margins independently.
2:69
12.0

Examples:
MARGIN TOP 0.5 IN

Sets top margin to 0.5 inch.
MARGIN L15 R15 T25 B25

Sets all four margins in a single command line (assumes current units are mm). Command Syntax:
.---------<--------. / | >--- MARGin ---*--- Left value -----| | | |--- Right value ----| | | |--- Top value ------| | | --- Bottom value ---+--->
Related Commands: Querying:
RESERVE Q MARGin Q OPTions
2.3.52
MARK
Function:
Defines if the Pipe revision attribute (REV) should be incremented and if the Branch detail attribute (DETA) should be set to TRUE after successful detailing by ISODRAFT. By default, the REV and DETA attributes will not be changed when a pipe or branch has been detailed. If MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute for each Branch detailed will be set to TRUE. If MARK REVISION ON is specified, the REV attribute of each Pipe detailed will incremented.
Description:
By default, ISODRAFT will not detail a pipe if any of its branches has its DETA attribute set to TRUE. To override this, use the command MARK IGNORE ON. The MARK command generates an inter-DB macro, to be run in DESIGN to set the REV and DETA attributes as described. This macro will be created (in the project's XXXMAC directory) only when you carry out a module change or execute a SAVEWORK command.
2:70
12.0

Examples:
MARK DETail ON
Sets the DETA attribute of each Branch to TRUE.
MARK REVision ON
Increments the REV attribute of the Pipe. The defaults for the detail and revision flag options are:
MARK DETAIL OFF MARK REVISION OFF MARK IGNORE OFF

Command Syntax:
>--- MARK ---+--- DETail -----. | | |--- REVision ---| | | --- IGNOre -----+--- ON ----. | | --- OFF* --+--->
Querying:
Q MARK Q OPTions
2:71
12.0

2.3.53
MATCONTROL
Creates a material control file. The material control file is an ASCII interface file which can be used to pass details of material requirements to an external material control program. This file contains fixed-format records of all materials incorporated into the isometric drawing, including piping components, tube, bolts, etc. A material control file is produced for each ISODRAFT DETAIL command. The file generated during a multiple plot run contains material records for all pipelines detailed by that command. The records thus derived are added to any records already in the file. This filing command always operates in append mode: that is, new data is always added to the end of any existing file of the same name rather than overwriting the current contents. If the specified file does not already exist, a new file of that name is created. To avoid accumulating large files (due to the use of append mode), always delete redundant files once the required data has been transferred to the external material control system. The data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated record of the quantity if each type of component for each pipeline or split drawing. Each record sequence begins with a general header, which includes references and specification applicable to the pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed breakdown of the individual items. You can add extra information to the basic material control file using the EXTENDED command. This adds the following to the file: Part numbers (in word 8 of component records) Item descriptions (as record -21) File header with: -5 record (originating program/version) -3 record (title block information)
Material Control File defines the codes used to identify the records. Command Syntax:
>--- MATControl ---+--- name ---+---EXTended--. | | | | -------------| |--- OFF ------------------| | | --------------------------+--->
Querying:
Q MATControl Q OPTIONS
2:72
12.0

2.3.54
MATERIALLIST
. Function: Description: Allows you to control whether the material list is shown on the isometric, and alter the display format if required. The MATERIALLIST command allows you to control: Whether or not the list is shown on the drawing at all. The default is for the list to be plotted. The position of the list on the drawing sheet. The default is left-hand side. Whether the characters used for plotting the list are small, medium or large. The default is medium. The spacing between the lines in the list, relative to the default of 100. The order that columns of details are shown on the list, and whether columns are displayed at all. The width of the itemcode column in characters. Default is 8 characters and the maximum length is 29 characters. Both lengths exclude the leading / in the PDMS name. Whether or not component descriptions are included in the list. By default all descriptions are included. Whether part numbers created in the SPOOLER module are used, or whether part numbers are generated automatically in ISODRAFT and held in the DESIGN database (using the PARTNUMBERS FROMDB command), or part numbers generated by ISODRAFT (using the PARTNUMBERS GENERATED command). If you are using totalled database part numbers, multiple part numbers will be output, separated by spaces, in a single entry in the material list, wrapping round if the column width is exceeded. You should ensure that the part numbers column is wide enough to display several part numbers (say, eight characters) or the material list will be just as long. The quantity column will show the total of like items. Part number tags will still be individual. How the overflow of long lists is to be handled, and if extra sheets are needed, how they are to be numbered.
Formatting the Material List If you leave ISODRAFT to its default settings (as described below), the material list will always be produced on the left hand side of the drawing sheet, using medium size characters to a standard linespacing. The itemcode column will be eight characters wide, and material descriptions will be included in the list. A separate material list will be plotted for every drawing sheet listing only the items on that sheet, with any continuations being plotted on a blank, dummy sheet.
2:73
12.0

These default settings will probably be appropriate for many uses of ISODRAFT. However, if need be you can change these settings to your own requirements. Examples of how to do this are included below. Long Material Lists, and Sheet Numbering If a material list is too long to fit onto one sheet it will normally be continued on a dummy sheet. This sheet will be identified DRG n OF m and will contain only the overflow of the material list. This is the default. Alternatively, you can specify that the material list will be continued in a second area beside the first one. This will result in a non-standard size for the drawing sheet, which will exceed the normal width by the amount needed for the second material list. Inclusion of Database Part Numbers The SPOOLER module allows you to set part numbers on: piping components; sections of tubes; bolts and additional items. If this feature is used it applies to an individual pipe, individual branch or to a drawing as defined in the SPOOLER module. The PARTNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you to include part numbers from the DESIGN database in the material list. If ISODRAFT finds any unnumbered parts it will display an error message and halt the drawing of the isometric. You can specify SEParate part numbers, which will generate an entry for each item; TOTalled part numbers, which will create a single entry for each item with a quantity or PIPEonlyseparate, which will list all pipes separately but will generate a totalled list of other components. If this part numbering feature of DESIGN has not been used, ISODRAFT will produce part numbers according to its own system defaults. If you are using the PARTNUMBERS FROMDB option you can define your own material list format. You can specify which items appear on the list, and in what order they appear. The TABLEDEFINITION command allows you to control the content, nature and order of standard column details in the material list. You can also define additional columns (using the commands TABLEDEFINITION COLUMNNUMBER text attribute). In this fashion you can define the additional column title, which SPCOM or component attribute or UDA will be used as data to fill the column, the column width and the order it will be shown on the list. A remarks column may be included for the cutting list remarks, since each piece of tube is listed separately.
2:74
12.0

The PARTNUMBERS PERSPOOL command displays part numbers separately for each spool. Note: If the attribute of a chosen SPCOM is a reference UDA, referring to a text element, then the value of STEXT for that text appears in the column. Examples: Material list formatting
MATE OFF
Material list not shown on drawing.
MATE RIGHT CHARH 2.0

Material list plotted on right-hand side of drawing sheet, using 2.0mm high characters.
MATE LEFT CHARH 2.5

Material list plotted on left-hand side of drawing sheet, using 2.5mm high characters.
MATE LSPA 105

Increases the line spacing by 5%
MATE CODE 12
Itemcode column 12 characters wide.
MATE NODESC
Material descriptions omitted from list.
MATE DESC
Material descriptions included in list.
MATE TABLED COL 1 QUANT

Defines column 1 in the material list as Quantity.
MATE TABLED COL 2 EMP

Sets column 2 as an empty column.
MATEriallist DRWG
Plots a separate material list on every drawing sheet, listing only items drawn on that sheet.
MATEriallist LINE
Plots, on the first drawing sheet, a single material list for the whole pipe line or system. Long material lists
MATE DUMMY
Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, with no isometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered. Multiple sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc. This is the default.
2:75
12.0

MATE DUMM SING

Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which has no isometric plot on it. Single sheets numbered 1 of 1. Multiple sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc.
MATE DUMM SUFF

Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which has no isometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered. Multiple sheets numbered 1 of n, 1A of n (for the sheet with the material list only), 2 of n etc
MATE OVER
Long list continued to the right of the preceding list on the same drawing sheet. Single sheets are not numbered. Note that this may produce non-standard drawing sizes.
MATE OVER SINGle

Long list continued to the right of the preceding list on the same drawing sheet. Sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc. Single sheets numbered 1 of 1. The default is:
MATE ON LEFT CHARH 2.45 LSPAC 100 CODE 8 DESC DUMMY DRWG
Related Commands: Command Syntax: ITEMCODE MTEXTS DTEXTS RESERVE
2:76
12.0

/ >-MATEriallist-*| || || || || || || || || || | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | || | | | | | | | || || | | | || -
.---------------------------------<-----------------------------------. | ON* -. | | | OFF -+---------------------------------------------------------------| | LEFT* -. | | | RIGHT -+-------------------------------------------------------------| | CHARHeight - value --------------------------------------------------| | LSPAcing - integer --------------------------------------------------| | CODE - integer ------------------------------------------------------| | DESCriptions* -------------------------------------------------------| | NODEscriptions ------------------------------------------------------| | TABLEdefinition -+---------------------------------------------------| | | - COLumn val -+- PARTnumber --------------------. | | | | |- DEScription -------------------| | | | | |- BORe --------------------------| | | | | |- ITEMcode ----------------------| | | | | |- QUANtity -+- IN -+- <munits> --| | | | | | | --------------------| | | | | |- REMarks -+- AND -+- <remarks> -| | | | | | | ---------------------| | | | | - <other> -----------------------+--| PARTNumbers -+- PERSPool -. | | | | ------------+-- FROMDB ---+-- SEParate ----------. | | | | | | |-- TOTalled ----------| | | | | | | -- PIPEonlyseparate --+-----| | | - GENerated -----------------------------| DUMMy* --. | | | OVER ----+-----------------------------------------------------------| | | |--- SUFFix ---+--------------------------------------------| | | | --------------+--- SINGle ---------------------------------| DRWG* --. | | | LINE ---+------------------------------------------------------------+-->
where <munits> is METres or MILlimetres. This lets you set the metric units to be used for pipe lengths in the Quantity column. Note: That this affects metric isos only. <remarks> is
2:77
12.0

.------------------------------------------------------------------------. / | --*- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -. .-----------. | | | / | | -------------+- ON -+- component -* | | | | | | |- TUBE ------| | | | | | | |- BOLT ------+- component -| | | | | | | |- TUBE ------| | | | | | | |- BOLT ------ | | | | - ALL -------+- nl -------------------| | | -------------------------
This allows attributes or UDAs to be taken from the catalogue or from the component, where component is one of the following: BEND CROSs LJSEnd SHU VFWAy ALL
<other> is -+- HEADing -. | | |-----------+- text -. | | - NOHeading --------+- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -| | | | | -------------| | - WEIGHT -+- TOTAL FABRICATION -. | | ---------------------+--. | .-----------------------------<-------------------------------- | --+- TOTAL ERECTION -. | | ------------------+- TOTAL COMBINED -. | | ------------------+- Factor F -| | | ------------|
ELBOw FBLInd OLET TRAP VTWAy
CAP FLANge TEE TUBE WELD
CLOSure FTUBe PCOMPonent UNIOn GASKet
COUPling INSTrument REDUcer VALVe SUPPort
Column width can be specified as part of the TABLEDEFINITION COLUMN syntax by adding:
- WITH WIdth value -+- nl -| | | ------
Querying:
Q MATEriallist Q OPTions
2:78
12.0

2.3.55
MATLISTFILENAME
Function:
Specifies the name of a file to which the material list is to be sent. Also specifies whether one file should be created for each plot, or one file for all plots. You can send a copy of the material list data to a text file. This file can be printed, and edited to produce, for example, an ordering schedule. The MATLISTFILENAME command specifies the filename and the page length (as the number of lines) for its formatted contents. The file contains Fortran carriage control characters and page headers and footers. Subsequent MATLISTFILENAME commands followed by the same filename will overwrite the file, unless you use the OVERWRITE option. By default, the material list is not sent to a file, so you do not have to specify a filename in order to use ISODRAFT. The default page length is 55 lines. Material list numbers are shown on the isometric plot even when the material list is sent only to a file.
Description:
Examples:
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST
Material list data sent to named file with default page length of 55 lines.
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST WITH 70 LINES

Material list data sent to named file with page length of 70 lines.
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST PERPLOT OVER WITH 70 LINES

Material list data sent to a number of files, one for each plot, with page length of 70 lines. The filenames are taken from the specified name, followed by an automatic numeric suffix (in a similar fashion to plotfile naming). The PERPLOTFILE OVERWRITE command overwrites any files that exists with the same name as the generated files.
2:79
12.0

Command Syntax:
>-MATListfilename-+-filename +-OVERwrite --. | | | | |-APPend -----| | | | | |-PERPlotfile +- OVERwrite -. | | | | | '-------------+-------------|-With integer Lines-. | | | | | -------------+--------------------| | | ---OFF*----------------------------------------------------+->
Querying:
Q MATListfilename Q OPTions
2.3.56
MESSAGEACCURACY
Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric are positioned on the isometric. The MESSAGEACCURACY RADIAL option determines the accuracy level of the radial search, based on the number of radial directions searched away from the arrowhead, the number of additional directions for kinked lines, and the length of increments of leader lines. The levels are as follows: Additional directions for kinked lines 2 directions @ 80 degrees 4 directions @ 40, 80 degrees 8 directions @ 20, 40, 80 degrees Length increments of leader line 4mm 2mm 1mm
Level
Radial directions searched away from arrowhead 18 directions @ 20 degrees 36 directions @ 10 degrees 72 directions @ 5 degrees
1 2 3
2:80
12.0

Once all messages have been positioned, the MESSAGEACCURACY ITERATIONS option repositions any messages with crossing leader lines, and all messages with leader lines passing through the text block. You can set a maximum number of iterations, and the process is repeated until one of the following conditions is satisfied: No leader lines cross and no messages need to be moved. The number of leader lines crossing and messages moving is the same as the previous iteration. The maximum number of iterations set by the option is reached.
You should start with accuracy level 1. Higher accuracy levels are achieved at the expense of performance. Increasing the number of iterations is not as expensive as higher accuracy levels, as often an equilibrium is reached before the maximum number of iterations. Thus it is recommended that the effect of increasing iterations be examined before increasing the accuracy level. Examples:
MESSAGEACC RADIAL 2
Sets the accuracy level to 2, as shown in the above table.
MESSAGEACC ITERATIONS 4
Sets the maximum number of iterations to 4.
MESSAGEACC DEFAULT
Sets the default conditions of level 1 accuracy and 1 iteration. Command Syntax:
>--- MESSAGEACCuracy ---+--- RADial --- level -----. | | |--- ITerations value -----| | | --- DEFault --------------+--->
Querying:
Q MESSAGEACCuracy
2.3.57
MESSAGEFILENAME
Specifies the name of the file to which messages about how detailing is progressing will be sent. Before ISODRAFT will carry out a checking or detailing operation, you must specify the name of a file to which error and/or progress messages can be sent. There is no default file name.
2:81
12.0

Examples:
MESS /ISOMESS
Creates a new message file.
MESS /ISOMESS OVER

Overwrites an existing file. Command Syntax:
>--- MESSagefilename filename ---+--- OVER ---. | | ------------+--->
Querying:
Q MESSagefilename Q OPTions
2.3.58
MTEXTS
Controls the material description part of item descriptions. A complete item description in a material list consists of the geometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXT element) and the material description (derived from the attributes of an MTEXT element). MTEXT has three attributes: XTEXT, YTEXT and ZTEXT. By default, the text which appears in the material list is the XTEXT attribute, but this can be changed so that the text stored in the YTEXT or ZTEXT attribute is displayed. This can be used, for example, to store descriptions in different languages. The MTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress the material description to give a more concise material list entry.
Examples:
MTEXts Ytext
Sets the description to the text held in the YTEXT attribute
MTEXts Ztext
Sets the description to the text held in the ZTEXT attribute
MTEXts Xtext
Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute. This is the default.
MTEXts IGNORE
Suppresses the material description completely.
MTEXts ON
Resets the material description to the text previously set. (XTEXT by default.) Related Commands: MATERIALLIST DTEXTS
2:82
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- MTEXts ---+--| |--| |--| |--| ---
IGNORE ---. | ON -------| | Xtext* ---| | Ytext ----| | Ztext ----+--->
Querying:
Q MTEXT Q OPTIONS
2.3.59
OPTIONS
Allows you to reset all options to their default settings. The OPTIONS command gives you a quick way of querying the current settings of multiple options or of resetting all options to their default states. Note that after giving this command, you must specify the destination (terminal or file) and the message file again.
>--- OPTions DEFault --->

Q OPTions Gives current settings of all options.
2.3.60
OUTCOM
Function:
Defines the style in which attributes are output on the isometric drawing area. You can also output the P3 directions of FTUB elements. You can output piping component attributes and user-defined attributes on the isometric drawing area. You can choose whether the text is boxed or unboxed, and the style of box used. You can also output empty boxes for manual mark-up. Six styles are available: A rectangular box with straight ends A rectangular box with angled ends A rectangular box with round ends A triangular box A diamond-shaped box Unboxed
Description:
2:83
12.0

Examples:
OUTC NAME SHOP :UDA1 ON INST ELBO PCOM WITH STR

Positions the attribute values for NAME, SHOP and the UDA values for UDA1 as straight edged boxed comments on all Instruments and Pcoms. The box leader line points to the centre of the component.
OUTC SHOP OFF

Switches off the output of the SHOP attributes for all components.
OUTC BLANK 6 ON BEND WITH ANGL

Outputs an empty angled-edge box on all bends with space for 6 text characters.
OUTC NAME ON ELBO OFF

Switches off output of the NAME attribute on ELBOWS.
OUTC P3DIRF WITH STRAIGHT

Outputs P3 directions for FTUB as a straight edged box. Restrictions: Command Syntax:
.-----<-----. | >- OUTCom -*- attribute -+ | | |- P3DIRFtub -+----------------. | | | |-------------+- ON component -+- WITH --. | | | | | | |---------+- BOXStyle style ---. | | | | | ----------------+- OFF ------------------------| | | - OFF -----------------------------------------------------+-> /
Triangular boxes will have a limit of two characters. Diamond boxes will have a limit of three characters. Unset attributes will not be output. Warnings are not output for unset or nonexistent attributes. Empty boxes which are drawn as unboxed will not be shown.
where attribute is one of the following: NAME LSTUbe ANGLe ALLOwance ATTYp BLANK n OWNER BUILt HEIGht CREF SPLN :udaname POSItion SHOP RADIus CRFA SPLT :udaname ORIentation ISPEc LOOSe CSTReLAXEs LEND NUMBER integer TYPE SPREf TSPEc LOFFl
2:84
12.0

where :udaname NUMBER integer outputs a single element of a UDA array. component is one of the following: BEND CROSs LJSEnd SHU VTWAy ELBOw FBLInd OLET TRAP WELD CAP FLANge TEE UNIOn GASKet CLOSure FTUBEINSTru ment PCOMPonent VALVe SUPPort REDUcer VFWAy ALL COUPling
style is one of the following: STRaight ANGLed ROUNd TRIangular DIAMond
2:85
12.0

Querying:
Q OUTCom
Lists all attributes output.
Q OUTCom attribute
Lists information about the named attribute.
Q OUTCom BLANK
Lists all blank lengths output, e.g. 6, 8, 12.
Q OUTCom BLANK n
Lists information about the blank of given length.
Q OUTCom UDA
Lists the names of all UDAs output.
Q OUTCom :udaname
Lists information for the named UDA.
Q OUTCom :udaname NUMBer integer

Lists information about the given element of a UDA array.
Q OUTCom PTDIRF
Lists information about tagging P3 directions on FTUBs.
Q OPTIONS
Lists all options set. Note: The following queries are for application work only, and should not be used in normal program use. Triplets are a combination of attribute, component and boxstyle:
Q OUTCom TRIPlets
Lists the number of triplets.
Q OUTCom TRIPlets n
Lists the details (component/attribute/ boxstyle) of triplet number n.
Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets
Lists the number of blank triplets.
Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets n
Lists the details (component/number of characters/ boxstyle) of blank triplet number n
2:86
12.0

2.3.61
OVERALLSKEWS
Function:
Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes are shown as overall skewboxes across branches, or as separate skewboxes between branch connections.
Examples:
OVERALLSKEWS ON
Triangle skewboxes shown as overall skewboxes across branches
OVERALLSKEWS OFF
Triangle skewboxes shown as separate skewboxes between branch connections. Related Commands: Command Syntax: SKEWBOX >--- OVERALLSKews ---+--- ON* ---. | | --- OFF ---+--> Q OVERALLSK Q OPTIONS
Querying:
2.3.62
PBENDNUMBERS
Numbering the pulled bends in Spool Drawings on an isometric. By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers for every pulled bend in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can be output on an isometric, by switching PBENDNumbers ON. Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics from the DESIGN database. The bends are sequentially numbered from one end of the Spool Drawing with a default prefix of B. The numbers are displayed in a diamond, with an arrow pointing to the pulled bend. If the total number of characters (prefix + number) is greater than 3, the number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g. <B232>.
Examples:
PBENDN ON PBENDN OFF
Switches pulled bend numbering on. Switches pulled bend numbering off. WELDNUMBERS
Related Commands:
JOINTNUMBERS
2:87
12.0

Syntax Graph:
>--- PBENDNumbers ---+--- ON ----. | | --- OFF ---+---> Q PBENDNumbers Q OPTIONS
Querying:
2.3.63
PICTURESCALE
Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing. For a given sheet size, the scale of the isometric drawing is set by default to give a good compromise between the amount of information displayed and its legibility. The PICTURESCALE command allows you to reset the scale. The value you give is the scale factor relative to the default value of 100. Note that changing the picture scale does not scale the whole isometric, but just affects the size of the symbols and annotation relative to the length of pipe shown. The material list is not affected. It is probable that increasing the picture scale much above 100 will split the drawing onto more sheets. See the SPLIT command for details of how this can be controlled.
Examples:
PICT 200 PICT 50
Magnifies the symbols to twice the size. Reduces the size of the symbols by half.
Related Commands: Command Syntax: Querying:
SPLIT
>--- PICTurescale --- value --->

Q PICTureSCale Q OPTions
2:88
12.0

2.3.64
PLOTDETAILDATA
Allows you to position parameterised attribute data within detail plots. Detail plots may also contain the parameterised values of any allowable type of system or user defined attributes. The attributes are defined using the PLOTDETaildata command. This definition includes the following fields: Which attributes to display. X, Y coordinates of the parameterised text, relative to the origin of the detail plot. Character height.
Angle at which to display text. The values of the different types of attributes are output as text records, using the following formats: Array attributes are shown separated by a line. Examples: Reference attributes are output as the full text of the attribute. Logical attributes are shown as T or F. Position, orientation and direction attributes are separated by spaces.
PLOTDET /DETAIL1 ATTR PPOS 1 x 10 y 10 h 10 a 45

Plots the value of attribute PPOS 1 in DETAIL1, at a position of 10:10 from the origin, with a character height of 10 and at an angle of 45.
PLOTDET /DETAIL6 ATTR DPFN x 10 y 5 h 3.5 a 0

Plots the value of attribute DPFN in DETAIL6, at a position of 10:5 from the origin, with a character height of 3.5 and at an angle of 0. Command Syntax:
>- PLOTDETaildata -- ATTRibute - ATQNUM --+| || || X -----. | Y -----| | Height-| | Angle -+- value ->
Querying:
Q PLOTDETaildata All
Will output all information for all detailed PLOT files.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename All

Will list details of all parameters for the given PLOT file.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename NUM/ATTRIBUTES

Will display the number of attributes for the given PLOT file.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename ATTR INT

Will return the X,Y coordinates, height and angle of the INTth parameter in the specified PLOT file.
2:89
12.0

2.3.65
PLOTTINGSCALE
Defines the scale of the plot independently of the drawing sheet size. By default, the actual size of the plotted drawing sheet generated by ISODRAFT is the same as the designed sheet size specified by the SIZE command. You can specify a plotted sheet smaller than the designed sheet by using the PLOTTINGSCALE command followed by a percentage scaling factor in the range 50-100%.
Examples:
PLOT 70.71
Applied to an A2 drawing, will create an A3 plot (70.71 = 1/ 2 expressed as a percentage). This can be useful if, for example, you want the drawing layout provided for an A2 plot, but you want output from an A3 plotter.
PLOT 50
Applied to an A1 drawing, will create an A3 plot. Command Syntax:
>--- PLOTtingscale value --->

where value represents a percentage scaling factor in the range 50-100%. The default is 100.
Querying:
Q PLOTT Q OPTIONS
2:90
12.0

2.3.66
POSITION
Allows you to create tables of standard text annotations or pipe attributes. All items of text used for the standard annotation of isometrics have default positions at which they are plotted on the drawings. Some of these texts, together with a list of specified pipe attributes, can be plotted in a separate area away from the main drawing. The standard text annotations which can be repositioned are as follows: The North direction arrow; Spool numbers; Sheet numbers; i.e. X in DRG X OF Y; Sheet totals; i.e. Y in DRG X OF Y; The Project Number; System isometric names; The Bend radius; The date.
You can also specify the positions of up to 100 additional pipe attributes such as the pipes name, owner, temperature and pressure rating, and include UDAs and user-specified text. You can also specify the position of drawing attributes when detailing a drawing as defined by the SPOOLER module, using the System attribute option. All text must be positioned in a margin, away from the drawing area, to avoid overwriting the isometric plot itself. You will normally allocate a suitable margin by using the MARGIN or RESERVE commands. Note: No checks on text positions are made by ISODRAFT, so you must take care not to corrupt the isometric by poor positioning. Note: Positioning an annotation at the origin (0, 0) has the effect of suppressing the output of that text. This is particularly useful for suppressing the output of names or the North arrow. It is possible to output the same piece of text at more than one position on an isometric plot by defining its coordinates more than once. The new definitions will not overwrite the earlier ones. The command POSITION text OFF is used to cancel a defined text position. You can define an angle of rotation for the positioned text, ranging from horizontal to vertical, using the ANGLE command. The POSITION command also allows you to produce a number of different tables on the isometric:
2:91
12.0

BENDING TABLES can be produced using the BENDTABLE command. This creates a sketch showing a schematic of a bend, annotated to show the various bend parameters, and a table giving the appropriate lengths, radii and angles for pulled bends appearing on that drawing. If needed, you can output the data as an ASCII file for transfer to a bending machine. Drawing History Tables can be included using the REVISIONTABLE command. This produces a detailed history of the drawing (for example dates, descriptions, who drew and approved the drawing and so on). Details for up to ten revisions of the isometric will be included (numbered 0 to 9). Only UDAs can be selected for the table, and each UDA represents a family (for example, :REV0 means subsequent table entries will be taken from :REV0, :REV1, :REV2 and so on until an unset attribute is found. Design Conditions Tables are available through the SYSTEMTABLE command. These apply to system isometrics or drawings as defined by the SPOOLER module. For each column a pipe attribute or UDA can be selected (see the tabledef syntax description). If a SHORTCODE is defined it will be used to label the divisions between pipes on a drawing (a shortcode of L will label pipes as L1, L2 etc.). This shortcode can be included in the table against the pipe name. Also, you can specify delimiter characters for pipe name prefix and suffix. If you select either or both delimiters for a name, the prefix or suffix will be stripped off before outputting the pipe name to the table. Therefore, two pipes forming one line on the P&ID, bearing the same basic name but with different area code suffixes, will appear as a single name in the table. Weld Tables can be included by using the WELDTABLE command, and this also allows you to create a Weld Report File. Note that WELDNUMBERS FROMDB must be selected if you wish to produce either a user-defined Weld Table or a Weld Report File (see the WELDNUMBERS command). Each column must be set to be filled by an attribute or UDA of the welds. You can choose one column as an alphanumeric sort key (the default being the weld number). If you choose a column other than weld number as a sort key, the table will be sorted firstly by your selected column and secondly by weld number. The sort order can be forwards (meaning numbers start at the top of the table) or reverse (numbers start at the bottom of the table). Column title can be left blank if needed, and you can leave column contents empty if desired. Dynamic Detail Area PLOT Files can be included using the DETAILPLOTS command. These can show details of any particular item of interest on the isometric (welded supports, drain and vent assemblies, complex manifolds etc.). Command Syntax:
2:92
12.0

>-POSItion ----. | >-TEXTPOSition-+-SYSTEMName-------. | | |-SPOOlnumber------| | | |-PROJnumber-------| | | |-DATE-------------| | | |-NORTHArrow-------| | | |-SHEETNumber------| | | |-SHEETTotal-------| | | |-BENDRADius-------| | | |-SYSTem attribute-| | | |-attribute--------| | | |-text ------------+-AT-+-X <uval> Y <uval>-. | | | | | | -Y <uval> X <uval>-+-CHARH val -+-ANGle val-. | | | | | | |-----------+-BOXed--. | | | | | | +-<xyoff>-<tab>------+-. | | ----------------------| | |- <reltxt> -------------------------------------------------| | | | | - OFF ------------------------------------------------------| |-BENDtable-------------------+- <possiz> --. | | | | | | |- FILEonly ---| | | | | | |-REVISIONTable---. - OFF --------+----------------------------------| | | | |-SYSTEMTable-----+- <possiz> -. | | | | | | |- OFF ------+-----------------. | | | | | - ADD -- <tabledef> ----------+------------------------------| | | |-WELDtable----+--<sortby>--. | | | | | | |------------+--<possiz>--. | | | | | | | | --FILEonly--| | | | | | | ----ADD---<tabledef>-----+--------------------------------------| | | | |-DETAILPlots -+-CORner-<possiz>-<direc>-+-STACK-<int>-<direc>-. | | | | | | | | ---------------------+- SCALE-<int> --| | | | | |-MAnual- CHARH val --SCALE-<int> -------------------------------| | | | | |-ON ------------------------------------------------------------| | | | | OFF -----------------------------------------------------------| |-TEXTs------------. | | | | |-ATTRibutes-------| | | | | |-SYSTEMATTRibutes-+---OFF------------------------------------------------------| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------+->
xyoff defines the x and y offsets between the columns and rows for positioning attributes on system isometrics, as follows:
>--+-- XOFFset - <uval> --+-- YOFFset - <uval> --. | ----------------------| | | -- YOFFset - <uval> --+-- XOFFset - <uval> --| ----------------------+-->
uval is a dimension in either the current or specified units. For example: X 10 Y 30 current units
2:93
12.0

X 0.5 inches Y 1.2 inches
specified units
reltxt positions the specified corner of the new text relative to the specified corner of the previous text by the X and Y offset distances. The syntax for this is:
- BL -| | - BR -| | - TL -| | - TR -+- RELto -+| || || Where: BL BR TL TR = = = = bottom left bottom right top left top right
BL -. | BR -| | TL -| | TR -+- XOFF -value-|- YOFF -value-|- CHARH -value-+- BOX -. | | | | +-------| -----------------------------------------------------+->
For example, the command: BR REL TL XOFF 10 YOFF 20 CHARH 2.5 BOX will position the bottom-right corner of the new text 10mm across and 20mm up from the top-left corner of the previous text. The new text will be boxed and have a character height of 2.5mm. tab defines the number of rows and columns in the table and the order in which they are filled:
>- DIREction -+- Horizontal -. | | - Vertical ---+- Rows value - Columns value ->
tabledef defines the headings and contents for the production of user defined tables. Note that ISODRAFT automatically tabulates the contents of the tables and draws lines between the rows and columns. The syntax is:
.----------------------------------------------------------------------------. >-+- COLumn number -+- HEADing--. | | | | | |-----------------+-----------+--text--. | | | | | | | - NOHeading---------+--FILL--. | | | | | | |--------+--attribute--. | | | | | | | | --SHORTcode--| | | | | | | --EMPty-----------------WIdth value--|
where number is the number of the column you wish to define, text is the column heading (in inverted commas), attribute is any attribute name and value is the column width in characters. Note that SHORTCODE applies to the System Table only. possiz allows you to position your table:
2:94
12.0

>- CORner -+||-
BL BR TL TR
-. -| -| -+- AT -. | | ------+- X <uval> Y <uval> -. | | - Y <uval> X <uval> -+- CHARacterHeight value ->
with BL being Bottom Left, TR being Top Right, and so on. This allows you to position one of the corners of the table exactly. direcn gives a direction for future detail plots:
>-- DIRection --+- Up ----. | | |- Down --| | | |- Left --| | | -Right --+-->
CHARHeight value is the character height in mm. The default size is 2.1mm, while the minimum size is 1.4mm. sortby is:
>-- SORTby -- attribute --+-- FORwards --. | | -- REVerse ---+-->
Note: For detailing at Branch level, attributes NAME, PSPEC, ISPEC, TSPEC and PTSP are taken from the Branch settings. Other attributes are taken from the Pipe settings. If you position any pipe attribute which has an associated ATEXT, the output of the Atext will be suppressed. Example: Defining a Spool Number Table A 4x3 table of spool numbers can be set up by using the command
POSI SPOOLN AT X 100 Y 10 CHARH 3 XOFF -10 YOFF 8 DIRE V R 4 C 3

These table parameters (i.e. X Offset -10mm; Y Offset 8mm; Character height 3mm; Direction Vertical; Number of rows 4; Number of columns 3) will generate the following output for a pipe containing 11 spools:
[8] [11] [10] [9] [7] [6] [5] -10mm
[4] [3] [2] 8mm [1] y x Direction of table
2:95
12.0

The origin of the table (which was positioned at X 100mm, Y 10mm by the POSI SPOOLN command) is at the bottom left-hand corner of the first spool number. If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS OFF before plotting the isometric, the space allocated for the table will appear as a blank area. If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS PREFIX, the prefix will be plotted with the spool number. If the number of spools exceeds the number of places available in the table (12 in this example), the table will be filled and then an error message will be generated. Example: Creating a Drawing History Table If you wished to plot a table that showed the history of an isometric and who was involved in its production, you could enter the following commands:
POSI REVISIONT COR BL AT X 20 Y 40 CHARH 2.0 COL 1 HEAD Rev :REV0 WI 3 COL 2 HEAD Description :DES0 WI 8 COL 3 HEAD Date :DAT0 WI 8 C0L 4 HEAD Drwn By :DRW0 WI 7 COL 5 HEAD Chkd By :CHK0 WI 11 COL 6 HEAD Appd By :APA0 WI 11 COL 7 HEAD Appd By :APB0 WI 9 EXIT
Example: A System Isometric The following commands will position the pipe attributes NAME, BORE, TEMP, PRESS and CCEN as shown in Examples of Isometric Plots. MATE OFF MARG R 120 DIME COMP ON SPLIT 1 DRW (Material List not plotted) (Set width of right margin) (Plot composite-style dimensions) (Plot whole system on a single sheet) ROWS 6 ROWS 6 ROWS 6 ROWS 6 ROWS 6 AS /
POSI NAME AT X480 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V COLU 1 POSI BORE AT X510 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V COLU 1 POSI TEMP AT X525 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V COLU 1 POSI PRESS AT X540 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V COLU 1 POSI CCEN AT X555 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V COLU 1 DETAIL /SYSTEM1 /SYSTEM2 /SYSTEM3 /SYSTEM4 ISOG96.TEST Querying: Q OPTions Q TEXTPOSitions Lists all current user-defined text positions.
2:96
12.0

Q TEXTPOSitions text
Lists the position of the attribute given by text.
The following Query commands list the parameters set for the item, as described in the previous pages:
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions TEXTPOSitions
SYSTEMName SPOOlnumbers PROJnumber DATE NORTHArrow SHEETNumber BENDRADius UDA BENDtable REVISIONTable SYSTEMTable WELDTable SYSTem TABlewidths
Note: The following queries are for application use only:
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT
Tells you the number of user text strings ( i.e. ABC strings) positioned.
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT n
Gives the actual string value for the item at position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT text

Gives the details (X, Y coordinates, character heights etc.) for text.
Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute
Number of pipe attributes/UDAs positioned.
Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute n
Gives actual attribute of item in position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSition <att>
Gives details of the named attribute.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute
Gives the number of drawing attributes/UDAs.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute n
Gives the attribute at position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute <att>

Gives the details of the named attribute.
2:97
12.0

2.3.67
POSTPROCESS
Function:
Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to be executed during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer file processing. The PREPROCESS command defines system commands which will be executed after the intermediate transfer file has been written and before ISODRAW is invoked. You can define up to five such commands, each identified by an integer. PREPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command
.----------------. / | >--- PREPROcess -+- integer - text --+-->
Description:
Related Commands:
POSTPROCESS PROCESS
2.3.68
PRECISION
Function: Description: Examples:
Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual. Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual.
PRECISION BORES NOMINAL

Sets bore dimensions to be nominal
PRECISION BORES ACTUAL

Sets bore dimensions to be actual Command Syntax:
>--- PRECIsion BORES ---+--- NOMINAL ---. | | --- ACTUAL ----+--->
Querying:
Q PRECIsion BORES
2.3.69
PREPROCESS
Function:
Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to be executed during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer file processing The PREPROCESS command defines system commands which will be executed after the intermediate transfer file has been written and before ISODRAW is invoked. You can define up to five such commands, each identified by an integer.
Description:
2:98
12.0

PREPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command'

>--- PRECIsion BORES ---+--- NOMINAL ---. | | --- ACTUAL ----+--->
Querying:
2.3.70
PROCESS
Instructs ISODRAFT to process a transfer file. The PROCESS command is used to process a transfer file. The operation takes account of any preprocessing or postprocessing actions which have been defined.
Examples:
PROCESS TRANS /TRANSFER

Processes a transfer file named /TRANSFER.
Command Syntax: Related Commands:
>--- PROCess TRANsferfilename filename --->

PREPROCESS POSTPROCESS
2.3.71
PROJECTNUMBER
Writes the project number in the title block area. The PROJECTNUMBER command writes the project number into the title block area. A project number of up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be used. The default is for no project number to be shown on the drawings. If PROJECTNUMBER FROMSYSTEM is specified, the project number shown on entry to the project, and stored within the System DB, will be plotted automatically. This text will have been set by the System Administrator using ADMIN.
Examples:
PROJECTN
FRO
The project number will be taken from the system project number.
PROJECTN AA-1234-ZZ
The project number will be AA-1234-ZZ.
2:99
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- PROJECTNumber ---+--- text ---------. | | --- FROmsystem ---+--->
Querying:
Q PROJECTNumber Q OPTIONS
2.3.72
Query
Function: Command Syntax:
Allows you to find the current settings of various options.
>--- Query --- option ---> The main ISODRAFT options are:
ATTAName AXES CHARHeight CONTinuationsym bols CONTNotes COORDS CUTTinglist DETAILList DTEXts FALLinglines INSTName ISOType KEYS LOOSeflangeallow ance MATControl MESSagefilename OUTCom CONTWelds CUTMarks DATE DIMDist ELEVations FLOWarrows INSULationcontr ol ITEMcode KEYS COOrdinates CUTPipelistfile DELImiter DIMEnsions EQUIPMENTNumberi ng FRAMe ISO ITEMcode LENGTH LEGLength MARK MATListfilename OPTions OUTCom value BLANK ATExt BENDRADius CLLEngthfilena me ATExt value BOLTing
keynumber
MARGin MATEriallist MTEXts OUTCom attribute
2:100
12.0

OUTPut UNITS PLOTTingscale REPEatbility SIZE SPLIt STACkingarrange ment SUPPORTFilenam e TAGging TEXPOSitions text TOLerance TRUNcate UNITS WELDId
OVERALLSKew s PROJECTNumb er REServe SKEWbox SPOOlnumbers
PICTurescale REFDIMensions RETUrnfilename SPECBreak
SUPPorts TAPping TITleblock TRACingcontrol TUBESplits WASTage WELDNumbers
SYMBolfilename TEXTPOSitions TITleblock value TRANsferfilename UNDerlayplotname WASTage integer WELDType
2.3.73
RECREATE
Creates a macro file or binary file which can then be run into ISODRAFT again. On UNIX workstations, the RECREATE command can be used to create a macro file which can then be read into ISODRAFT again to recreate the existing option settings or the detail list. See the Software Customisation Guide for more information about writing and using macros. You can also use the RECREATE command to save the screen layout, which can then be read in again using the INSTALL SETUP command. RECREATE has other options available in different PDMS modules. See the relevant Reference Manuals for details.
Examples:
RECReate OPTions /OPT OVER

Saves the current option settings in a file named /OPT. Any existing file named /OPT will be overwritten.
RECReate DETAillist /LIST

Saves the detail list in a file named /LIST
RECReate /DISP
Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.
2:101
12.0

INSTALLSETUP
>-- RECReate --+----------------. | | |-- OPTions -----| | | -- DETAillist --+-- filename --+-- OVERwrite --. | | ---------------+-->
2.3.74
REFDIMENSIONS
Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off. If reference dimensions have been set up in the DESIGN database, they can be shown on isometric plots by using the REFDIMENSIONS command.
Examples:
REFDimensions ON
Displays reference dimensions.
REFDimensions OFF
Reference dimensions are not displayed. Command Syntax:
>--- REFDimensions ---+--- ON ----. | | --- OFF ---+--->
Querying:
Q REFDIMensions Q OPTIONS
2.3.75
REMOVE
Removes named elements from the list of items to be processed by the next DETAIL or CHECK command. The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can be defined before giving the CHECK or DETAIL command by setting up a Detail List. You add elements to the list using the ADD command and remove them using the REMOVE command. The next CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command acts on elements in the current Detail List (that is, all elements in the Add List except those in the Remove List).
2:102
12.0

Examples:
REMOVE /PIPE3-1 /BRAN3-2-2

Removes the named elements from the Detail List.
REMOVE EMPTY
Empties the Remove List. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
.----<------------------------------------------------. / | >-- REMove ---+--- <gid> ---------------------------------------------| | | |-- SHEETNumber --+--- integer --. | | | | | | --- SINGle ---+---------. | | | | |-- SPOOL --+-- integer --+-- OF integer --| | | | | | | | | ----------------| | | | | | | -- text ----------------------+-- <gid> ---| | | ----EMPTY----------------------------------------------+--->
ADD
CHECK
DETAIL REPEATABILITY
Note: The DETAIL EMPTY also empties the Remove List. See the DETAIL command. Restrictions: The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in a Remove List is 100. The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only add sheetsfor a Pipe which has previously been detailed with Repeatability on, so that split points have been stored in the DESIGN database. See the REPEATABILITY command. Lists contents of both Add and Remove lists.
Querying:
Q DETaillist
2:103
12.0

2.3.76
REPEATABILITY
Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated split points for subsequent storage in the DESIGN database. When a pipe is detailed which needs splitting over more than one sheet, ISODRAFT automatically generates split points. Normally this data is not stored, and so if the design is altered and the pipe detailed again, the split points may be in different places. Repeatability allows you to save these split points in a macro to be run in DESIGN. This macro stores the split point information in the DESIGN database. You can then use this information to replot single sheets when you have made changes to your design which only affect those sheets, keeping the split points in the same positions as before. A function in the SPOOLER module allows you to erase this split point information if need be. Repeatability is not available for system isometrics or equipment trims. Split ATTAs are automatically created at split points, in correct list order, with correct coordinates. Once in place they are indistinguishable from split ATTAs that have been manually created. They can be repositioned as required. The macro will select the ATTA using default selectors, and then set its ATTYPE attribute to XXXX. (The macro will be handled in the same manner as an inter-DB connection macro.) Note: Prior to Version 10.4, the REPEATABILITY command also stored spool identifiers in the database. This function is now replaced by the SPOOLER module functionality.
Examples: Related Commands: Command Syntax:
REPE ON REPE OFF ADD DETAIL REMOVE SPLIT

>--- REPEatability ---+--- ON------. | | --- OFF* ---+--->
2:104
12.0

Restrictions:
Split ATTAs will not be automatically created if some already exist in the pipe. Re-ordering branches will destroy the integrity of the repeatability data. Repeatability is not available for system isometrics or equipment trims.
Querying:
Q REPEATABILITY Q OPTIONS
2.3.77
RESERVE
Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom of the drawing area or the Material list. You can reserve an area at the bottom of the drawing area or Material list, which will be left blank when the isometric is plotted. Note that if you want a blank area across the whole sheet, not just the drawing area, you should use the MARGIN command to specify a large bottom margin. A reserved area can be used for standard notes, detail PLOT files, a company name, etc. or it can be filled by information on a backing sheet using the UNDERLAYPLOT command. The default is a reserved height of zero; that is, no reserved area.
Examples:
RESERVE 30
Reserves an area 30 units high across the drawing area.
RESERVE 2 INCH
Reserves an area 2 inches high across the drawing area.
RESERVE MAT 30
Reserves an area 30 units high across the bottom of the Material list Related Commands: Command Syntax: MARGIN
>--- REServe -+-- <uval> --------------------. | | -- MATeriallist --- <uval> ---+--->
Querying:
Q REServe Q OPTions
2:105
12.0

2.3.78
SETCOMPDATE
Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB. Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB. You can set the comparison date to an actual date, to a stamp, or, for a specific DB, to an exact session number and/or extract number. The comparison date can be used in queries and, for example, in Change Highlighting, where it is necessary to specify a comparison date in order to determine which elements have been changed since the specified date. Note: If a stamp is used to set the comparison date, this will set the comparison session for each database within the stamp. It will also reset any comparison dates set previously. Querying a date will only return a value if the last SETCOMPDATE command used a date on its own, otherwise it will return 'unset'. Similarly, querying a stamp is only valid if the last SETCOMPDATE command used a stamp.
Examples:
SETCOMPDATE 10 January 2002

Sets the comparison date to 10 January 2002.
SETCOMPDATE STAMP stamp 016

Sets the comparison date to stamp 016. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
>- SETCOMPDATE -+- <date> -------------------------------------------------------------. |- STAMP - name -------------------------------------------------------| - FOR - DB - dbname - TO -+- <date> ----------------------------------| |- Session - integer - EXTRACT -+- integer -| | '- dbname -| |-- Session -- integer ---------------------| -- EXTRACT -+- integer --------------------| - dbname ---------------------+->
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING
Querying:
Q COMPDATE EXTRACT FOR DB CTBATEST/DESI Q COMPDATE COMPDATE SESSION FOR DB CTBATEST/ DESI
2:106
12.0

2.3.79
SIZE
Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawing sheet. The SIZE command allows you to specify the dimensions of the drawing sheet; either in current or specified units, or as a standard ISO or American drawing sheet size. The default is ISO A2. ISODRAFT will subtract the current margins and reserved area (if any) before laying out the isometric plot, the material list, frame and title block in the remaining area of the sheet.
Examples:
SIZE A3 SIZE AA SIZE H 300 W 400
Specifies ISO A3 size. Specifies American A size Specifies dimensions 300mm high x 400mm wide (assuming current units are mm).

>--- SIZE ---+--| |--| |--| |--| |--| |--| |--| ---
MARGIN
RESERVE
AA ---. | AB ---| | AC ---| | AD ---| | AE ---+---------------------------------. | A --- integer --------------------------| | Height --- value --- Width --- value ---| | Width --- value --- Height --- value ---+--->
Restrictions: Querying:
Standard ISO sizes, as defined by integer, must be in the range A0 to A4. Q SIZE Q OPTions
2.3.80
SKEWBOX
Controls how skewed piping is represented. Any skewed sections of piping, whether or not they involve a fall, can be represented either by full boxes (2D or 3D; see the FALLSKEWS command) or by triangles.
2:107
12.0

Full box
Figure 2:6. Full and triangle skewboxes.
Triangle
If triangle representation is specified, the following options are available: The dimensions can be shown in standard form or in a nonstandard form. The triangle areas can be shown hatched (shaded), partially hatched or unhatched. Skew triangles can be tagged with swing angles in the corners of the triangles. These are output in the first corners of the triangles in the direction the line is detailed. H and V notes can be output in the right angle corners of horizontal (H) and vertical (V) triangles. Overall skewboxes, or skewboxes between branches, can be shown.
Standard dimensioning
Figure 2:7.
Non-standard dimensioning
Hatched
Standard and non-standard dimensioning styles, and hatching.
2:108
12.0

Standard dimensioning shows the horizontal and vertical dimension lines of the triangle standing out from the sides of the triangle. Non-standard dimensioning shows the dimension characters positioned along the sides of the triangle itself. The default is standard dimensioning. The default standout distances for the two types of dimensioning are: 13mm line standout for standard dimensioning 4mm character standout for non-standard dimensioning
By default, skewbox triangles are highlighted by parallel-line hatching with a spacing of 3mm between the hatching lines. The hatching can be switched off, the spacing altered or an area of the triangles selected for hatching. Note that these standout distances may not be set to the same value as other standout distances.
2:109
12.0

Figure 2:8.
Overall and individual skewboxes.
Figure 2:9.
Skewed and falling line with hatched triangle skewboxes.
2:110
12.0

Examples:
SKEWBOX FULL
Skews shown by full boxes
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE
Skews shown by triangles with standard dimen-sioning, 13mm (default) standout for dimension lines, and hatching at 3mm (default) spacing
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE NSTD HATCH OFF STANDOUT 7MM

Skews shown by triangles with non-standard dimensioning (characters along triangle sides), a character standout of 7mm, and no hatching
25mm
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE STANDOUT 20MM HATCH PART 25

Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning, a dimensioning line standout of 20mm, and partial hatching at standard spacing for a length of 25mm (being the maximum height that the shading will reach).
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE TAGS ANGLES

Skews shown by triangles with standard dimen-sioning, 13mm (default) standout for dimension lines, and hatching at 3mm (default) spacing, with swing angles shown in the first corners Related Commands: Command Syntax: FALLINGLINES DIMDISTANCE FALLSKEWS OVERALLSKEWS
2:111
12.0

>- SKEWbox -+-- FULL ----. | | - TRIangle -+- NSTD --. .-----------------------------------------. | |/ | ---------*- HATCH -+- <uval> -+- PART/IAL -+- <uval>-| | | | | | | | | - OFF ---| | | | | | | ----------------------| | | | | |-- OFF --------------------------| | | | | |-- DEFault ----------------------| | | | | ---------------------------------| | | |-- STANdout --+-- <uval> ------------------| | | | | |-- DEFault -----------------| | | | | ----------------------------| | | |-- TAGS ------+-- ANGles --. | | | | | | |-- HV ------| | | | | | | |-- ON ------| | | | | | | -- OFF -----+---------------| | | -------------------------------------------+>
Querying:
Q SKEWbox Q OPTIONS
2:112
12.0

2.3.81
SPECBREAK
Specifies the level at which a change of pipeline specification is noted, and which changes are recorded on the isometric. Pipeline specification changes are indicated by notes against the corresponding points on the isometric plot. By default, specification changes are noted at component level, but they can be noted at Branch level instead. SPECBREAK BRANCH causes only changes in the Branch specification to be recognised. SPECBREAK COMPONENT causes the Branch specification to be ignored and changes to be recognised only in the component attributes LSTUBE or SPREF, or in the Branch attribute HSTUBE . The format in which a specification change is shown is that both the original and new specifications are shown at each point of change. The format is similar to that used for dimensioning. SPECBREAK can be further modified to output specification changes for material, insulation, tracing, paint, and (up to) five user-defined specifications. By default, only specification changes for Pipe will be output. By switching SPECCHANGES to ON, you can output the other changes. The following Atext defaults are associated with the specification breaks on the drawing area: Specification Pipeline name Material spec Insulation spec Specification ATEXT 288 PIPE 253 SPEC PIPING Spec Break ATEXT 288 PIPE 289 MATL 290 INSUL
270 THERMAL INSULATION SPEC 271 TRACING SPEC 272 PAINTING SPEC 293 to 297 null
Tracing spec Painting spec User defined
291 TRACE 292 PAINT 293 to string 297 null
2:113
12.0

Examples:
SPECB COMP
Recognises changes in component specifications only.
SPECB BRAN
Recognises changes in branch specifications only.
SPECB BRAN SPECC ON

Recognises changes in branch specifications only, and outputs specification changes for insulation, tracing and paint. Command Syntax:
>- SPECBreak -+- COMPonent* -. | | - BRANch -----+- SPECChanges -+- ON ---. | | | | - OFF* -+ | | ------------------------+>
Querying:
Q SPECBreak Q OPTions
2.3.82
SPLIT
Controls the number of drawing sheets used when a pipeline is split over more than one sheet. If a pipeline is too long or complex to fit on a single isometric plot, ISODRAFT will automatically split the pipeline over separate drawings. Each drawing will be identified as DRG 1 OF ..., DRG 2 OF ..., etc. You can control the relative complexity of each drawing, or the number of drawings into which the isometric is to be split, by using the SPLIT command. You can control splitting either by giving a split factor, or by specifying the number of drawings used for the isometric. The default value of the split factor is 100. Note that this value does not relate directly to either the number of fittings or the amount of text on a sheet. It is a measure of the complexity of the drawing, relative to its size, on an arbitrary scale. Greater sheet complexity is specified by giving a split factor greater than 100, and lower complexity by giving a split factor less than 100. You can control exactly where pipes are split by using Split ATTAs in the design. If user-defined positions for splits have been created in the design, ISODRAFT will always use these and not calculate its own split points. Split points in tube can be controlled by the TUBESPLITS command.
2:114
12.0

Examples:
SPLIt 3 DRwgs
Splits the isometric into 3 drawings.
SPLIt 75 PERCent
Splits the isometric so that the complexity of each drawing is 75% of the default. Related Commands: Restrictions: Command Syntax: ERASE REPEATABILITY TUBESPLITS Only single pipelines can be split into a fixed number of drawings.
>--- SPLIt --- value ---+--- DRwgs -----. | | --- PERCent ---+--->
The default is 100 percent. Querying: Q SPLIT Q OPTions
2.3.83
SPOOLNUMBERS
Specifies how individual pipe spools are identified on isometrics. SPOOLER can generate spool numbers per spool drawing. These spool numbers are stored in the Fabrication DB and can be imported into ISODRAFT by using the FROMDB command. If you dont use the FROMDB option but switch spool numbering on, ISODRAFT will number the spools. These numbers are not maintained between sessions. The parameters that ISODRAFT uses to number spools are as follows: Spools are numbered sequentially from the start of the pipeline. If a Tee is encountered, numbering continues down the off-line leg before returning to the main line sequence. Spools are identified on the isometric plot by spool numbers plotted in square brackets, e.g. [8], on the first leg of a pipe. They are also listed at the end of the material list. By default, spools are numbered continuously from one drawing to the next. The command SPOOLNUMBERS PERDrawing causes spool numbering to be restarted at 1 on each new drawing sheet. For details of how to plot pipe spools on separate drawing sheets, see the ISOTYPE command. The PREFIX option can be used to combine the spool numbers with either user-specified text or the SPLP attribute of Pipe and Drawing in DESIGN. ISODRAFT can insert generated sheet and spool numbers into a userdefined spool name if wildcard characters * are included in the text.
2:115
12.0

Examples:
SPOOLN FROMDB
The spool numbers generated in the SPOOLER module will be used by ISODRAFT in the isometric plot and spool list.
SPOOLN PREF FROMDB

The spool numbers will be generated, with the prefix taken from the DESIGN SPLP attribute.
SPOOLN ON
Spool numbers are generated by ISODRAFT and shown on the pipes and below the material list.
SPOOLN OFF
Spool numbers are not shown at all.
SPOOLN PREF Tube Spec: PERD

Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, and the prefix will be included in all spool numbers in the drawing area. Spool numbering will restart at 1 on each new drawing sheet.
SPOOLN PREF /PIPE1/DRE*/SPL*

Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, and the sheet and spool numbers will be written into the prefix name. So, for example, the identifier PIPE1/DRG2/SPL3 will be generated automatically for spool 3 of drawing 2 of PIPE1. This format can only be used with the SPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING option. Related Commands: ISOTYPE
Command Syntax:
>-- SPOOlnumbers --+-| | | | | |-| | | | |-| |-| -PREFix - + - text ----. | | - FROMDB -+- PERDrawing --. | | ---------------| | PERDrawing --+-- PREFix - + - text ---| | | | | - FROMDB --| ------------------------| | FROMDB -------------------------------| | ON* ----------------------------------| | OFF ----------------------------------+-->
Note: * Spool numbers are generated for each isometric, with no relationship to any data stored in the databases.
2:116
12.0

Restrictions:
The maximum number of spools per pipe is 99. The maximum length of the spool prefix is 40 characters.
Querying:
Q SPOOLNumbers Q OPTions
2.3.84
STACKINGARRANGEMENT
Positioning multiple plots on the paper. When you are using multiple PLOT files, you can specify the layout of the individual plots on the paper. You can align the plots along the paper, that is with their long sides parallel to the length of the paper, or across the paper, that is with their short sides parallel to the length of the paper. You can specify how many drawings should be plotted in the given direction. The default format is STACKINGARRANGEMENT 1 ALONG which produces a single row of drawings with their long sides aligned with the length of the paper. Note that you must ensure that there is enough room across the width of the paper for the arrangement you have specified. The length of the paper is specified in the FILE command. The stacking facility has no meaning, and is ignored, when single PLOT files are used.
2:117
12.0

Examples:
STACK 2 ACROSS
will orientate the drawing frames across the width of the paper, two abreast:
direction of paper movement
STACK 3 ALONG
will orient the drawing frames along the width of the paper, three high:
direction of paper movement
FILE SIZE
>--- STACkingarrangement -- value --+--- ALONg ---. | | |--- ACROss ---| | | --------------+-->
Querying:
Q STACkingarrangement Q OPTions
2.3.85
SUPPORTFILENAME
Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule is to be sent. Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule is to be sent. If the OVERWRITE option is included, any existing file of the given name will be overwritten by the new schedule data.
2:118
12.0

Examples:
SUPPORTF /SUP1
Sends the pipe support schedule to a file named SUP1.
SUPPORTF /SUP1 OVER

Overwrites the pipsupport schedule in the file SUP1.
SUPPORTF OFF
Stops the pipe support schedule being written to a file. Command Syntax:
>--- SUPPORTFilename --+-- name --+-- OVERwrite --. | | | | ---------------| | | --- OFF* -----------------+-->
Restrictions: Querying:
For system isometrics, no information will be written to the support file Q SUPPORTFilename Q OPTions
2.3.86
SUPPORTS
Function:
Defines whether support positions are dimensioned as overall or string dimensions, and whether supports are shown at all on the isometric. Support positions may be dimensioned in one of two ways, overall or string. The default is SUPPORTS STRING. Support information can also be omitted completely from the isometrics. Note that the position of support dimensions, that is whether they are on the same side or the opposite side to the string or composite dimensions, is controlled by the DIMENSIONS HANGERS command.
Description:
Examples:
SUPPorts SUPPorts SUPPorts
OVErall STRing OFF
Supports dimensioned from previous support. Supports dimensioned from previous component. No support information shown. Related Commands: DIMENSIONS DIMDIST
2:119
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- SUPPorts ---+--- STRing* ---. | | |--- OVErall ---| | | --- OFF -------+--->
Querying:
Q SUPPorts Q OPTions
2.3.87
SYMBOLFILENAME
Specifies the name of a symbol library. The SYMBOLFILENAME command loads a file of user-defined symbols previously created in PDMS DRAFT. You can define this file as read-only if you want to protect the symbol definitions from subsequent modification.
SYMBOLF /SYMFILE1
>- SYMBOLFilename -+- filename -+- READONLY -. | | | | |- WRITE* ---| | | | | ------------+-> - OFF ->
Querying:
Q SYMBOLFilename
Lists the name and contents of the current symbol library. It will not tell you what the listed symbols look like.
2.3.88
TAGGING
Allows you to identify individual components on the isometric plot by means of name tags. By default, component names are not plotted. Fittings of generic type INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, VENT, VTWA and VFWA can have their PDMS names (if they have them) shown against their plotted symbols on the isometric. If a component of a valid type exists in the pipeline but has not been named when TAGGING ON is specified, ISODRAFT will recognise that it has a system name only and will not plot any name. However, if ITEMCODE ON has been specified the component will be labelled with its itemcode.
Related Commands:
INSTNAME
ITEMCODE
2:120
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- TAGging ---+--- ON -----. | | --- OFF* ---+--->
Querying:
Q TAGging Q OPTions
2.3.89
TAPPING
Sets the scale of the tapping leg and switches tapping leg dimensions and coordinates on and off. The TAPPING command controls the display and scale of tapping branches, that is offline connections to PCOMs, SHUs, Flanges and Filters.
Examples:
TAPping SCALe 75
Sets the scale of the tapping leg to 75% of the default value.
TAPping SCALe DEFault

Resets the default scale.
TAPping DIM ON
Switches tapping leg dimensions on.
TAPping DIM OFF

Switches tapping leg dimensions off.
TAPping DIM DEF

Reset to the default, which is dimensioning ON.
TAPping COORDS ON
Switches tapping leg coordinates on.
TAPping COOR OFF

Switches tapping leg coordinates off.
TAPping COORDS DEF

Resets to the default, which is coordinates off.
TAPping DEFault
Resets all tapping defaults, which sets the scale to 100%, dimensioning to ON and plotting to OFF.
2:121
12.0

Command Syntax:
.-----------------<--------------------. / | >-- TAPping --*--- SCALe ---+--- value -----. | | | | | | --- DEFault ---+----------| | | |--- DIMensions ----. | | | | |--- COORdinates ---| | | | | |--- COORDS --------+--- ON -------------| | | | | |--- OFF ------------| | | | | --- DEFault --------| | | ----------------------- DEFault --------+->
Querying:
Q TAPPIng Q OPTIONS
2.3.90
TEXTPOSITION
See POSITION command.
2.3.91
TITLEBLOCK
Allows you to add extra text to the title block. The title block is produced automatically. Extra text can be added to the title block by using the TITLEBLOCK command, followed by the line number and the text to be added. Title block lines can be input in any order. You can underline a line of text by putting the _ character (underscore) at the end of the line. You can create a vertical bar from the previous horizontal line down to the next horizontal line by putting the | character (vertical bar) in the text. ISODRAFT will accept a maximum of 25 title block lines. Each line may contain up to 39 characters (including spaces, but excluding the underscore character).
2:122
12.0

Examples:
The following sequence will add the text illustrated below:
TITLE TITLE TITLE TITLE
1 2 4 3
THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRA TITLE BLOCK INFORMATION A VERTICAL LINE WITH | TO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCORE _
THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRA TITLE BLOCK INFORMATION TO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCORE A VERTICAL LINE WITH DATE: 24 JUL 87 PROJECT NO: VC12 BATCH REF: A16 /OG8 /CG14 PIPING SPEC: PS20 ISS: 1 DRG NO 1 OF 2
0-4201
Related Commands: Command Syntax: DATE POSITION
>--- TITleblock --- value ---+--- text ---. | | -------------+--->
Querying:
Q TITleblock Q TITleblock value Q OPTions
2.3.92
TOLERANCE
Specifies the maximum misalignment between components regarded as having the same axis. By default, two components will be plotted as though they have a common axis if the orientation of their axes differs by less than 0.06 degrees, or if their axes are offset by less than 1.00mm. The TOLERANCE command allows you to specify a different alignment tolerance, either as an angular difference or as a linear offset.
2:123
12.0

Examples:
TOL OFFSET 0.125 INCH

Two components will be plotted as having a common axis if their axes are offset by less than 0.125 inch.
TOL ANGLE 0.15

Two components will be plotted as having a common axis if the orientations of their axes differ by less than 0.15 degrees.
TOL DEFAULT
Resets the default values of 1mm offset or 0.06 degrees angular difference. Restrictions: If gaskets of less than 1mm thickness are detailed, a tolerance offset of less than the gasket thickness must be set. Care should be taken when specifying non-default values, since large tolerances can cause falling lines to be shown incorrectly. For reliable plotting of falling and skewed lines, a lower value than the default (say TOL OFF 0.01) may be appropriate. Command Syntax:
>--- TOLerance ---+--- OFFset --- <uval> ---. | | |--- ANGle --- value -----| | | --- DEFault -------------+--->
Querying:
Q TOLerance Q OPTions
2.3.93
TRACINGCONTROL
Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted. Any piping component which has its TSPEC attribute set may be shown traced. Insulation and tracing can be shown: On tubing only On tubing and pipe components
By default, tracing is not identified on the isometric. The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will be shown in the title block.
2:124
12.0

Examples:
TRAC ON
Shows tracing on the tube only, not on the pipe
TRAC TUBE
components.
TRAC ALL
Shows tracing on both tube and components.
TRAC OFF
Suppresses the display of tracing. The default is TRACINGCONTROL TUBE. Related Commands: Command Syntax: INSULATIONCONTROL
>------ TRACingcontrol -------+--| |--| |--| --ON ------. | TUBE* ---| | ALL -----| | OFF -----+--->
Querying:
Q TRACingcontrol Q OPTions
2.3.94
TRANSFERFILENAME
Allows you to save a transfer file generated during ISODRAFTs data extraction operations, for subsequent processing. The transfer file is not normally visible to you, but it can be copied into an ASCII file by using the TRANsferfilename command. Any transfer file which currently exists with the specified filename will be overwritten by the new file resulting from the next DETAIL or CHECK command. Note that transfer files produced by versions of ISODRAFT before Version 10.3 are in binary format and cannot be processed by the PROCESS TRANSFERFILE command.
Examples:
TRANSFER /TRANS
Saves the transfer file as a file named TRANS.
TRANSFER OFF
No transfer file will be produced. Related Commands: PROCESS
2:125
12.0

Command Syntax:
>--- TRANsferfilename ---+--- filename ---. | | --- OFF --------+--->
where filename is the name of a file in your working directory. Querying: Q TRANSferfilename Q OPTIONS
2.3.95
TRUNCATE
Stops rounding remainders of dimensioning being added to the next dimension. When dimensioned isometrics are plotted, all dimensions are rounded up or down to the nearest mm or 1/16 inch, depending on the current output units. By default, ISODRAFT carries over any remainder (positive or negative) from a rounded dimension and adds it to the adjacent dimension. This process minimises cumulative errors over a number of consecutive dimensions, but it can result in identical fittings being shown with different lengths (usually differing by 1mm or 1/16 inch). You can specify that ISODRAFT is to truncate all dimensions. The remainders from rounding of the individual dimensions will then be discarded rather than added to the next dimension. Remember that this can result in a significant cumulative error over long pipelines with many individually dimensioned components.
Examples:
TRUNcate ON TRUNcate OFF TRUNcate DEFault
Truncates dimensions. Does not truncate dimensions Does not truncate dimensions.
Command Syntax:
>--- TRUNcate ---+--- ON --------. | | |--- OFF* ------| | | --- DEFault ---+--->
Querying:
Q TRUNcate Q OPTIONS
2:126
12.0

2.3.96
TUBESPLITS
Controls how splits in tube are placed. ISODRAFT may generate splits in tube. You can use the TUBESPLITS command to output a message if this happens, or to stop isometrics with splits in tube being produced.
Examples:
TUBES OFF
This command will allow generation of isometrics with splits in tube, but the message UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT will be displayed. Repeatability information will not be updated.
TUBES OFF NOP

Will prevent the generation of isometrics with splits in tube. The message UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT will be written to the message file and the pipeline will be rejected. Repeatability information will not be updated.
TUBES ON
Returns to the default condition of allowing splits in tube. Command Syntax:
>-- TUBESplits --+-- ON ---------------------. | | -- OFF --+-----------------| | | --- NOPicture ---+--->
Querying:
Q TUBESPLITS Q OPTIONS
2.3.97
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME
Allows you to plot ISODRAFTs output on top of background plots previously created in a PDMS drawing module. You can superimpose an ISODRAFT PLOT file onto an underlay plot. This facility is used, for example, for underprinting isometric plots with company-standard drawing sheet information. You can specify up to eight underlay plots, giving them numbers so that they can be switched off if required.
2:127
12.0

Examples:
UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE1
The drawing stored in the file /BKGRNDS/STYLE1 will be plotted on the same sheet as the next isometric plot. By default, this will be underlay number 1.
UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 2
The drawing stored in file /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 will be plotted on the same sheet as the next isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF
The plot given as underlay 1 will not be plotted with the next isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF 2
The plot given as underlay 2 will not be plotted with the next isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF ALL

No underlay will be plotted. Related Commands: Command Syntax: MARGIN RESERVE
>--- UNDerlayplotname --+-- filename --+-- integer --. | | | | -------------| | | --- OFF ------+-- integer --| | | |-- ALL ------| | | -------------+->
Restrictions:
The underlay plots must have the same sheet size as that specified for the ISODRAFT output. If not, the command will be ignored. Q UNDerlayplotname Q UNDerlayplotname integer Q OPTions
Querying:
2.3.98
UNITS
Specifies units of measurement used for ISODRAFTs output. The units used for length and bore dimensions on isometric drawings can be specified independently from the units used for input data. By default, lengths along pipelines (for component dimensioning, tube lengths, etc.) are shown in metric units, and pipe bores are shown in imperial units. Note: That input units are specified by the commands BORES and DISTANCES.
2:128
12.0

Examples:
UNITS METRIC
Outputs metric lengths and metric bores.
UNITS IMPERIAL
Outputs imperial lengths and imperial bores. Measurements between 1 and 2 will be output in inches; for example, 15.
UNITS IMPERIAL FT
Outputs imperial lengths and imperial bores. Measurements between 1 and 2 will be output in feet and inches; for example, 13.
UNITS METIMP
Outputs metric lengths and imperial bores. Related Commands: Command Syntax: BORES DISTANCES
>--- UNIts ---+--- METRic -----. | | |--- IMPerial ---+--- FT ---. | | | | ----------| | | --- METImp* ---------------+--->
Querying:
Q OUTPut UNIts Q OPTions Note: Q UNITS gives the current units for input measurements (see BORE and DISTANCE commands), not output measurements.
2:129
12.0

2.3.99
WASTAGE AREA
Defines wastage areas which can be given different wastage factors for cut pipe lengths. When cut pipe lengths are calculated, ISODRAFT can include extra material to allow for wastage during cutting and fabrication. A complete plant can be split up into a maximum of ten wastage areas, numbered 0 to 9, and each wastage area can be allocated a wastage factor. Default values for the wastage factors for areas 1-9 are all 1. The wastage factor for area 0 is fixed at 1 (i.e. no wastage allowance).
ISODRAFT uses the wastage factors to modify the cut pipe lengths as follows: In the DESIGN database, the EREC attribute for a pipe branch can be set to an integer, which corresponds to the wastage area for all tube in the Branch. EREC=10 is treated as area 0, EREC=11 is treated as area 1, and so on. Each tube item may have, included in its Specification, a standard wastage allowance (PWAS) in the form of an added percentage. When calculating a cut pipe length, ISODRAFT multiplies the standard wastage allowance (PWAS) for the appropriate type of tube by the wastage factor for the area in which the length occurs (determined by the EREC for the branch). The corrected percentage allowance thus calculated is then added to the nominal length of the pipe to give the cut length which is plotted on the drawing.
Note: That a cut pipe list is only output if you have given the CUTTINGLIST command. Examples: Consider a length of pipe connecting two components whose separation measured along the pipe centreline is 1000mm. Assume that the tube specification has PWAS set to 10; that is, a 10% allowance is preset. Assume that the pipe length forms part of a branch for which the EREC attribute has been set to 3. Assume that the wastage factor for wastage area 3 has been set to 1.2 by using the command
WASTAGE AREA 3 1.2

Then the wastage allowance calculated by ISODRAFT will be (1000 x 10% x 1.2) mm, i.e. 120mm, and the cut pipe length given on the isometric will be 1120mm. Command Syntax:
.-------------<----------. / | >--- WASTage ---*--- ARea integer value ---+--->
2:130
12.0

Restrictions:
ISODRAFT only includes a wastage allowance if WASTAGE AREA has been set. The default is for no allowance, even if PWAS has been set. Q WASTage Q WASTage integer Q OPTIONS shows value for the area number queried
Querying:
2.3.100 WELDID
Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric by name. Welds which have their NAME attribute set in the DESIGN database can have their names plotted against their symbols on the isometric. By default, weld names are not shown on the isometric plot.
TAGGING WELDNUMBERS WELDTYPE

>--- WELDId ---+--- ON -----. | | --- OFF* ---+--->
Querying:
Q WELDId Q OPTions
2:131
12.0

2.3.101 WELDNUMBERS
Numbering the welds on an isometric. The SPOOLER module allows automatically, and store these database. If this feature is used it individual branch or to a spool SPOOLER module. you to set weld numbers numbers in the DESIGN applies to an individual pipe, drawing as defined in the
The WELDNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you to access these numbers from the DESIGN database. When using this feature, if ISODRAFT finds any unnumbered welds it displays an error message and halts the drawing of the isometric. If the weld numbering feature of DESIGN or SPOOLER has not been used, ISODRAFT can produce weld numbers according to its own system defaults. However, these numbers are not maintained between revisions. Whether you generate weld numbers in DESIGN, SPOOLER or in ISODRAFT, the size of the weld number characters can be specified using the CHARHeight setting. A table of the weld numbers can also be output onto the drawing sheet. The type of weld to be numbered can be fabrication only, erection only, or both. Weld numbering can be switched off completely, which is the default. Additional welds can be shown on the isometric either in individual balloons or, if there are more than a specified number of them, as an arrowed message in a single ellipse (with the numbers separated by slashes). Note: That if you used the SPOOLER module to generate weld numbers, you can output a weld table on the isometric to your own specifications using the POSITION command. For generated weld numbers, the table has a fixed position and content.
2:132
12.0

Examples:
WELDN CHARH 1.5 FAB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers with a character height of 1.5mm.
WELDN CHARH 1.8 EREC BOX

Outputs erection weld numbers with a character height of 1.8mm, and tabulates them in a box immediately above the title block.
WELDN CHARH 2.0 BOX

Outputs all weld numbers with a character height of 2.0mm in a table.
WELDN OFF
Suppresses the output of weld numbers.
WELDN FAB FROMDB

Outputs fabrication weld numbers from the DESIGN database.
WELD CHARH 2 FAB AWELD BALLO 6

Output includes numbers for additional fabrication welds. These will be shown in separate balloons if there are no more than 6, otherwise they will be shown together in an ellipse. Related Commands: Command Syntax:
>- WELDNumbers -+- OFF ----------. | | |- ON -----------| | | CHARH- value -+- FABricationonly -. | | |- ERECtiononly ----| | | -------------------+- GENerated -. | | |- FROMDB ----| | | -------------+ |- NOBOX -. | | |- BOX ---| | | ---------+--. | .----------------------------------<--------------------------------------' | --+- AWELD -+- BALLOon value -. | | | | |- ELLIPse -------| | | | | - OFF -----------+ | | ---------------------------+->
POSITION
WELDID
WELDTYPE
Querying:
Q WELDNumbers Q OPTIONS
2:133
12.0

2.3.102 WELDTYPE
Controls which types of end connection are to be shown on isometric drawings. By default, all types of end connection are shown on isometrics. The WELDTYPE command specifies whether all end connections, no end connections, only shop status end connections or only site status end connections will be shown.
Examples:
WELDType FABrication
Only shop status end connections will be shown.
WELDType SITE
Only site status end connections will be shown.
WELDType ON
All types of end connection will be shown.
WELDType OFF
No end connections will be shown.
WELDType FORCesite
Shows all end connections as if they were shop status end connections. For example, force site welds will be shown as fabrication welds. Command Syntax:
>--- WELDType ---+--| |--| |--| |--| --ON* -----------. | OFF -----------| | SITE ----------| | FABrication ---| | FORCesite -----+--->
Querying:
Q WELDType Q OPTIONS
2:134
12.0

2.3.103 ZEROLENGTHSKEWS
Function:
Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line. When modelling falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets, you can position a zero-length variable-angle bend at the offline p-point of each Tee or Olet.
Description:
If falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets are modelled with zero-length variable-angle bends at the offline p-point of each Tee or Olet, you can connect a vertical Branch. The ZEROLENGTHSKEWS command suppresses dimensioning skewboxes for Butt Weld Tees or Olets in falling lines if zerolength bends have been included in the model. Bends at Tees or Olets will only be considered as zero-length if they are less than 0.5mm long. Bends with dimensions greater than this will be detailed as normal components.
Examples:
ZEROlengthskews ON
Output skewboxes at vertical connections to falling lines.
ZEROlengthskews OFF
Suppress skewboxes at vertical connections to falling lines. Related Commands: Command Syntax: FALLINGLINES
>--- ZEROlengthskews ---+--- ON* ---. | | --- OFF ---+--->
2:135
12.0

2:136
12.0

Symbol Keys
Symbol Keys
Note: How to define symbol keys is described in the chapter Symbol Keys, of the ISODRAFT User Guide.
3.1
Introduction
This appendix lists the symbol key (i.e. the SKEY text attribute) and the plotted symbol used to identify each type of component on isometric drawings. There is a section for each generic type. The sections are in alphabetic order of generic type: BEND (see ELBOw) CAP CLOSure COUPling CROSs ELBOw FBLInd (Blind Flange) FILTer FLANge FTUBe (Fixed-length Tube) INSTrument LJSEnd (Lap Joint, Stub End) OLET (see TEE) PCOMponent (Pipe Component) REDUcer SHU TEE See ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys. See CAP Symbol Keys. See CLOS Symbol Keys. See COUP Symbol Keys. See CROS Symbol Keys. See ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys. See FBLI Symbol Keys. See FILT Symbol Keys. See FLAN Symbol Keys. See FTUB Symbol Keys. See INST Symbol Keys. See LJSE Symbol Keys. See TEE or OLET Symbol Keys. See PCOM Symbol Keys See REDU Symbol Keys. See SHU Symbol Keys. See TEE or OLET Symbol Keys.
3:1
12.0

Symbol Keys
TRAP UNIOn UNIVersal VALVe VENT VFWAy (Four-way Valve) VTWAy (Three-way valve) WELD FLOR (Pipe through floor)
See TRAP Symbol Keys. See UNIO Symbol Keys. See UNIVERSAL Symbol Key. See VALV Symbol Keys. See VENT Symbol Keys. See VFWA Symbol Keys. See VTWA Symbol Keys. See WELD Symbol Keys. See Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol.
Symbol Key Reference Index is an alphabetical list of symbol keys cross-referenced to the generic types of the components to which they refer.The following information is given for each SKEY: Component description SKEY Plotted symbol P-points The actual component description A four-letter identifier The symbol plotted on isometrics, plus dimensions (in mm) The position and direction of the P-points with respect to the plotted symbol. P-points needed to specify components fully are shown against the symbols. P-points which are optional are not shown, but their effects are explained in the notes when appropriate. The numbers in the right-hand column refer to the notes at the end of each section.
Notes
3.1.1
P-points
When you define piping components in PARAGON, you must remember the following rules so that ISODRAFT can produce isometrics correctly: P0 is automatically set and defines the origin of the component. For two-way components, the arrive and leave p-points must be numbered P1 and P2 (not necessarily in that order). For two-way valves, the spindle direction must be indicated by P3. For three-way components, the offline leg must be indicated by P3. The spindle direction for three-way valves must be specified by using a p-point greater than P3, which must have its bore unset. For four-way components, the two straight-through flows must have p-points P1/P2 and P3/P4. The spindle direction for four-way valves must be specified by using a ppoint greater than P4, which must have its bore unset. For eccentric reducers without a connection point, the flat side must be indicated by P3. Eccentric reducers with a connection point must use P3, with a valid bore set, to indicate the connection point and must use P9, with bore unset, for orientation of the flat side.
3:2
12.0

Symbol Keys
For U-bends (defined as bends of more than 135 degrees), the p-points must be set as shown for each symbol.
3.2
CAP Symbol Keys

Component Description Cap - Butt Weld SKEY KABW
5.5 3.5
1 0 2
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1
Cap Compression
KACP
3.75
1 0 2
1
2.0
Cap - Screwed
KASC
3.5 1.5
1 0 2
Cap - Socket Weld
KASW
3 .5
D
1 .5
1 0 2
Note: 1. The p-point configurations refer only to Caps used solely for blanking and are positioned on the axis of the appropriate face (depending on type). Caps with different p-point configurations, such as flipped Caps (where P1 is Pleave and P2 is Parrive) or Caps used as Reducers, can result in incorrect output.
3:3
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.3
CLOS Symbol Keys

Component Description Pipe Block Fixed Length SKEY PF
4.75
Plotted Symbol
P-points
0 1 0 1 2 2
Note
2.5
Pipe Block Variable Length
PV
4.5
0 1 2
2.5
3.4
COUP Symbol Keys

Component Description Nipple - Screwed SKEY NRSC
2.0 4.0
0 1 2
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
Nipple - Screwed
NBSC
0
1.0 4.0
2.5
Coupling Compression
COCP
3.5 3.5 2
1.5
0 1 2
Coupling - Screwed
COSC
3.5 2
2.5
0 1 2
3:4
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Coupling - Socket Weld
SKEY COSW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
2.5 3.5 2
0 1 2
D D
2
Butt Weld Elbolet
CEBW
6.5
8.0
1
) (
1.5
0 1 2
Socket Weld Elbolet
CESW
6.5
8.0
) (
1
1.5
0 1 2
Screwed Elbolet
CESC
6.5
8.0
1
) (
1.5
0 1 2
Note: 1. The dimensions of these components depend upon plotted leg length. The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.
3.5
CROS Symbol Keys

Component Description Cross - Butt Weld SKEY CRBW
3 1 0 4 2
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 2
Cross - Socket Weld
CRSW
Cross - Compression
CRCP
3 1 0 4 2
3:5
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Cross - Flanged
SKEY CRFL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 2
3
0 4
Cross - Screwed
CRSC
3 1 0 4 2
Cross - Set on
CRSO
) ( ) (
3 1 0 2 4
1, 2
Cross - Set on Reinforced
CRRF
) (
REINFORCED
1,2
3 1 0 2 4
) (
Cross - Generic Ytype with variable angle out- and offlegs
X@**
VARIABLE ANGLE
VARIABLE ANGLE
3,4,5
3 1 0 4 2
VARIABLE ANGLE
Notes: 1. The positions of P3 and P4 along the vertical axis are important for deriving correct cut pipe lengths. The vertical displacements of P3 and P4 are determined by the points at which the offline legs intersect the main line. P0, P1, P2, P3 and P4 will be coincident when the offline leg has the same bore as the main line. 2. The dimensions of all Cross components depend upon plotted leg length. The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm. 3. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwed PL for plain 4. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the range 1 to 4, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned to the largest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for X1**, X2**, X3** or X4**.
3:6
12.0

Symbol Keys
5. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on the tube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and flanged representation on the component cannot be enforced. ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys
3.6
ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys
Component Description Elbow - Butt Weld (90 and 45 degree)
SKEY
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,9
ELBW
0 2
Elbow - Butt Weld with a Connection (90 and 45 degree)
ETBW
2
1,5,9
Elbow - Butt Weld 180 degree Return (U Elbow)
EUBW
4 1 3 0 5 2
2,9
Elbow Compression (90 and 45 degree)
ELCP
1 0 2
1,9
Elbow Compression with a Connection (90 and 45 degree)
ETCP
2
1,5,9
) ( ) (
Elbow - Screwed with Male Ends (90 and 45 degree)
EBSC
1 0 2
1,9
Elbow - Screwed with Female Ends (90 and 45 degrees)
ELSC
1,9
3:7
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Elbow - Screwed Female with a Connection (90 and 45 degree) Elbow - Socket Weld
SKEY ETSC
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,5,9
2
) (
) (
ELSW
1 0 2
1,9
Elbow - Socket Weld with a Connection
ETSW
2
1,5,9
) ( ) (
Elbow - Reducing
ER**
( )
1,6
1 0 2
Bend - Flanged (all angles)
BEFL
1 0 2
1,9
Bend - Flanged with a Connection (all angles)
BTFL
) (
2
1,5,9
) (
Bend - Flanged 180 degree Return (U Bend)
BUFL
4 1 3 0 5 2
2,9
Bend - Mitre
MIFL
1 0 2
1,9
Flanged Bend - Mitre with a Connection Flanged
MTFL
2
1,5,9
3:8
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Bend - Mitre
SKEY MIBW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,7,9
0 2
Bend - Mitre
MIPL
1 0 2
1,8,9
Butt Weld Bend Mitre with a Connection
MTBW
2
1,5,9
Butt Weld Bend Mitre with a Connection
MTPL
2
1,5,9
Bend - Lobster Back Flanged
L@FL
1 0 2
1,3,9
Bend - Lobster Back with a Connection Flanged
T@FL
2 3 0 1
1,3,5,9
Bend - Lobster Back Butt Weld
L@BW
1 0 2
1,3,9
Lobster Back Bend
L@PL
1 0 2
1,3,8,9
Bend - Lobster Back with a Connection
T@BW
2
1,3,5,9
3:9
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Bend - Lobster Back with a Connection
SKEY T@PL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,3,5,9
Bend - Pulled (All Angles)
PB+D
1 0 2
1,4,9
Bend - Pulled 180 degree Return (U Bend)
BU+D
4 1 3 0 5 2
2,4,9
Bend - Pulled with a Connection (All Angles)
TB+D
2
1,4,5,9
Notes: 1. Generic types ELBO and BEND have a connection reference to facilitate connections to the elbow or bend. ISODRAFT will always treat an elbow or bend as having an offline leg if it has a P3 with a bore greater than zero. Care is needed when selecting a symbol key and point set in order to achieve the required results. 2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram and P3 should not have its bore set.
2 5
0 1 4
3. Replace the @ character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the number of segments. 4. Replace the + character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the ratio of the bend radius to the pipe bore. 5. The p-point for the offline connection (P3) can be positioned anywhere along the horizontal (P1) axis that suits your specific component design. 6. Reducing elbows can have any of the end types BW, CP, FL, SC, or SW, but not PL. 7. This type of component is treated as a fitting in the material list. 8. This type of component is treated as tube in the material list.
3:10
12.0

Symbol Keys
9. The dimensions of all Elbow and Bend components depend upon plotted leg length. The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.
3.7
FBLI Symbol Keys

Component Description Flange - Blind SKEY FLBL
4.5
1 0 2
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
2.5
Flange - Reducing Concentric
FLRC
4.5
1
) (
0 1 2
1.0
Flange Eccentric
Reducing
FLRE
4.5
1,2
) (
10 3 2
1.0
Notes: 1. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight their presence. 2. P3 is used only for orientation and will have its bore unset.
3.8
FILT Symbol Keys

Component Description Filter/Strainer Straight Through SKEY FI**
4.5 8.0
0 1 2
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1
Filter/Strainer - Angle
FA**
9.0
2 0 1
1,2
9.0 4.5 8.0
3:11
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Filter/Strainer - Offset
SKEY FO**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,3,5
6.0 8.0
6.0
Filter/Strainer Return
FR**
1,4
4.5
2 1
8.0
Notes: 1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwed PL for plain 2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram:
P0 P2
P1
3. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram:
P0 P2 P1 P1 P3 P0 P3 Plan P1 P0 P2 P3 End P2
P1
P0
P3 Side
P2
Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be coplanar. 4. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram:
3:12
12.0

Symbol Keys
P2
P3 P0 P1
Note: That P3 is used only for orientation purposes and will have its bore unset. The horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1(and similarly P2 and P3) may be coincident. 5. Generic type FILT has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers. If the connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a parrive, a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side. If the connection facility is to be used, P3 will be the connection p-point and as such must have valid bore and orientation data for the connection. As the flat side can be either in the same direction as the connection or directly opposite, a P9 p-point must be used to give the orientation of the flat side.
3.9
FLAN Symbol Keys

Component Description Flange - Blind SKEY FLBL
1 0 2
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
5.0
1.0
Flange -Flared/Loose Backing FLFL
3.5 1.0
1
1 0 2
) ( 5.0
Flange - Backing
FLLB
3.5
1.0 ) ( 5.0
2
1 0 2
Flange Concentric
Reducing
FLRC
3
2
5.0
) (
1.0
3:13
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Flange Eccentric Reducing
SKEY FLRE
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 3
2 3
5.0
) (
1.0
Flange - Screwed FLSC
5.0 3.5 2.0 ) (
0 1 2
1.0
Flange - Slip On
FLSO
5.0
) (
1.0
Flange - Slip On with J Type Weld FLSJ
0
1
2
5.5
) (
1.0
Flange - Orifice Slip On FOSO 4
5.5
) (
3 0 1 2
1.0
Flange - Socket Weld FLSW
0
5.5
3.5
) (
1.0 2.0
3:14
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Flange - Weld Neck
SKEY FLWN
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
5.5
) (
0 1 2
4.0
Flange - Orifice Weld Neck
FOWN
5.5 ) ( 3 1.0 3.0 01 2
Notes: 1. To allow for the amount of pipe that normally passes through the component before cutting or grinding off, a cutting allowance is included if the LOOSE attribute of the flange is set to TRUE. This allowance is determined by the value of the ALLO attribute, if set. If the ALLO attribute is not set (or set to zero), the allowance will default to 150mm. However, this default value can be altered by the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command. 2. The system used by previous version of the software (using intuitive P3 points) is still supported. 3. To be used in conjunction with LJSE symbols FLRG or FLSE. 4. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight their presence. 5. Orifice flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight their presence.
3.10
FTUB Symbol Keys

Component Description Fixed Length Pipe With flanged ends Fixed Length Pipe Without flanged ends SKEY FPFL Plotted Symbol P-points
0 1 2
Note 1
FPPL
2.0 4.0
0 1 2
Fixed Length Pipe - to be displayed and stretched, like implied tube on an isometric
TUBE
0 1 2
3:15
12.0

Symbol Keys
Notes: 1. The dimensions of all piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.
3.11
INST Symbol Keys

Component Description Instrument SKEY II** Plotted Symbol P-points Note 1,5
2
4.5 8.0
0 1
Instrument - Angle
IA**
4.0
9.0 9.0
0 1
1,2,5
4.0
Instrument - Offset
IO**
4.5
1,3
3 2
8.0
Instrument - Return
IR**
4.5
8.0
3 2 1 0
1,4
Instrument - Dial
IDPL
6.5 DIA
3
6
3.0
2 0 1
Instrument - Dial Flanged
IDFL
6.5 DIA
3
6
3.0
2 0 1
0.25
Orifice Plate
OP
3.0 3.0 5.5
0 1 2
3:16
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Restrictor Plate
SKEY RP
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
1.0 3.0
5.5
Rupture Disk
DR
2.5
4.5 2.0
0 1 2
3.5
Valve - Angle Relief/ Vent
RA**
4.0
2.5 4.5 8.0 4.75
1,5
2 03 1
Valve - Angle Pressure Reducing
XA**
4.0
2.5 4.5 8.0 4.75

2 03 1
1,5
Valve Control
CV**
4.0 6.5
4.0 1.5 2.0
1,5
1 03 2
Valve - Angle Control
CA**
4.0 3.25
4.0 2.0 2.5
1,5
2 03 1
4.75
Valve - 3 Way Control
C3**
4.0 4.75
4.0 1.75 2.25 9.25
1,5
0 4 1 3 2
4.75
Valve - 4 Way Control
C4**
4.0
9.25
1,5
8.0
4 05 1 3 2
4.75
Valve - Control Square Indicator
SV**
4.0
4.5 2.0 3.5 14.0
1,5
1 03 2
Valve - Angle Control Square Indicator
SA**
4.0
4.5 2.0
1,3
8.0
03 2
3:17
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Valve - 3 Way Control Square Indicator
SKEY S3**
Plotted Symbol
4.5 2.0 4.0 3.75
P-points
Note 1,5
4 0 2 3
4.75
Valve - 4 Way Control Square Indicator
S4**
8.0 4.75
9.25 4.0
1,5
3 1 0 4 2
Valve Control Motorised Indicator
MV**
4.0
4.0 2.5
1,5
1 0 3 2
6.5
Valve - Angle Control Motorised Indicator
MA**
4.0
4.0 2.5
1,5
8.0
03 2
6.5
4.5
Valve - 3 Way Control Motorised Indicator
M3**
4.0
4.0 2.5
9.25
8.0
4 0 2 3
1,5
4.75
Valve - 4 Way Control Motorised Indicator
M4**
9.25
3 1 0 4 2
1,5
4.0 8.0 4.75
Valve - Control Hand Indicator
HV**
4.0 6.5
4.0 3.0 2.0
1,5
1 03 2
Valve - Angle Control Hand Indicator
HA**
4.0 9.25
4.0 3.0 2.0
1,5
3 1
8.0
0 2
4.75
Valve - 3Way Control Hand Indicator
H3**
4.0 9.25
4.0 3.25 2.75
1
8.0
4 0 2 3
1,5
4.75
3:18
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Valve - 4Way Control Hand Indicator
SKEY H4**
Plotted Symbol
9.25
P-points
Note 1,5
4.0 8.0 4.75
0 4
Valve Reducing
Pressure
XV**
4.0
3.0
1,5
4.0 2.5
03
5.75
3.5
Valve - Relief/Vent
RV**
3.5
1,5
4.0 4.0
03
9.25
P0 P2
P1
3:19
12.0

Symbol Keys
P1
P0
P3 Side
P2
P2
P3 P0 P1
Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and P3) may be coincident. 5. If an orientation p-point (P3) is present in the point set and is oriented away from the XYZ axes, then the orientation of this p-point will be shown on the isometric. 6. Instrument dials can have a P3 with an unset bore for orienting the dial. This p-point will normally be positioned perpendicular to the dial face, on the dial axis. A message will be output near the component showing the orientation of P3.
3:20
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.12
LJSE Symbol Keys

Component Description Lap Joint Ring Loose SKEY FLRG
2.5
Plotted Symbol
1.0
P-points
Note 1
1 0 2
) ( 5.0
Lap Joint Stub End Loose
FLSE
2.5
1.0
10
) ( 5.5
Note: 1. To be used in conjunction with FLAN symbol FLLB.
3.13
PCOM Symbol Keys

Component Description Block - Angle SKEY BA**
4.5
Plotted Symbol
9.0
P-points
Note 1,2
1
2
9.0
4.5
Block - Offset
BO**
5.5
8.0 6.0
0
8.0
1,3
3
1 2
Block - Return
BR**
5.5
1,4
2 1 3 0
21.5
26
Expansion Bellows
EX**
0.7
01
3.4 5.6
3:21
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Flame Trap
SKEY FT**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1
5.5 5.0
01
Block - Angle
BA**
4.5
9.0
0 1
1,2
9.0
4.5
Flexible Hose
FX**
2.5
5.5
01
Hose Coupling
CH**
4.5
01
2.5
Non-category Item NC**
2.5
4.5
01
Plug
PL
3.0
2.0
1.5
1 0 2
2.5
Restrictor Plate
RP
5.5
3.0
01
1.0
Sight Glass
SG**
5.5 5.5
1,5
4.4
3:22
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Slip Plate
SKEY SP
Plotted Symbol
2.25
P-points
Note 5,6
2.25 7.0
10
1.25
Slip Ring
SR
2.25
3
5,6
2.25
10 2
7.0
1.25
Spectacle Blind
SB
6.0
2.25 4.50
5,6
3 10 2
1.25
Tundish (Funnel)
TU**
5.0 3.0
4.0
2
1
8.0
0 1
3:23
12.0

Symbol Keys
P0 P2
P1
P0 P2 P1 P1 P3 P0 P3 Plan P1 P0 P2 P3 End P1 P0 P2
P3 Side
P2
P2
P3 P0 P1
Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and P3) may be coincident.
3:24
12.0

Symbol Keys
5. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point will be shown on the isometric. 6. The p-point set shown represents a typical arrangement for positioning and orienting the component, but is not mandatory.
3.14
3.14.1
REDU Symbol Keys

Concentric Reducers
Component Description Reducer - Concentric Butt Weld
SKEY RCBW
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1
5.5
01 2
3.5
) (
) ( 0.75
Reducer - Concentric Fabricated from Plate
CPBW
6.5
01 2
1
3.5
) (
) ( 1.0
Reducer - Concentric Swaged from Pipe
CSBW
6.5
01 2
1
3.5
) (
) ( 1.0
Reducer - Concentric with a Connection Butt Weld
CTBW
6.5 3.5
3
1
) ( ) ( 1.0
01 2
Reducer - Concentric with a Connection Fabricated from Plate
CZBW
6.5 3.5
3
1
) ( ) ( 1.0
01 2
Reducer - Concentric with a Connection Swaged from Pipe
CXBW
6.5 3.5
3
1
) ( ) ( 1.0
01 2
3:25
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Reducer - Concentric Compression
SKEY RCCP
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1
5.5 4.0
01 2
3.0
Reducer - Concentric Flanged
RCFL
3.5
5.5 4.5
01 2
Reducer - Concentric Fabricated from Plate Flanged
CPFL
3.5
5.5 4.5
01 2
Reducer - Concentric Swaged from Pipe Flanged
CSFL
3.5
5.5 4.5
01 2
Reducer - Concentric with a Connection Flanged
CTFL
3.5
5.5
3
1
4.5
1 0 2
Reducer - Concentric with a Connection Fabricated from Plate Flanged
CZFL
3.5
5.5
3
1
4.5
1 0 2
Reducer - Concentric with a Connection Swaged from Pipe Flanged
CXFL
3.5
5.5
3
1
4.5
1 0 2
Reducer - Concentric Nipple
RNSC
3.5
6.5 1.0
1 0 2
3:26
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Reducer - Concentric Screwed
SKEY RCSC
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1
5.5
1 0 2
3.5
1.0
Reducer - Concentric with a Screwed Connection
CTSC
3.5
6.5 1.0
1 0 3 2
Reducer - Concentric Socket Weld
RCSW
3.5
6.5 1.0
1
1 0 2
Reducer - Concentric with a Connection Socket Weld
CTSW
3.5
6.5 1.0
1 0 3 2
Reducer - Concentric Socket Weld Bush
RBSW
3.5
6.5 1.0
1
1 0 2
Special Flange
Reducing
RF
4.75
3.25
1
1.0
1 0 2
Note: 1. A concentric reducer with a connection point will have an additional p-point, P3, with a valid bore. A concentric reducer without a connection will have only a p-arrive and pleave, as shown.
3:27
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.14.2
Eccentric Reducers
Component Description Reducer Butt Weld Eccentric
SKEY REBW
Plotted Symbol
5.5 5.5 ) ( ) (
P-points
Note 1,2
2.0
1 0
Reducer - Eccentric Fabricated from Plate
EPBW
5.5 ) (
5.5 ) (
1,2
2.0
1 0
Reducer - Eccentric Swaged from Pipe
ESBW
5.5 ) (
5.5 ) (
1
2.0
1 0
Reducer - Eccentric with a Connection Butt Weld
OTBW
5.5
6.5
1,2
2.0
3 10 9 2
Reducer - Eccentric with a Connection Fabricated from Plate
EZBW
5.5
6.5
1,2
2.0
3 10 9 2
Reducer - Eccentric with a Connection Swaged from Pipe
EXBW
5.5
6.5
1,2
2.0
3 10 9 2
Reducer Screwed
Eccentric
RESC
5.5
6.5
2.0
10
3:28
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Reducer - Eccentric with a Connection Screwed
SKEY
Plotted Symbol
5.5
P-points
Note 1,2
OTSC
5.5
) (
) (
2.0
3 10 9 2
Reducer Flanged
Eccentric
REFL
4.8 5.6
1.5
10
1,2
Reducer - Eccentric Fabricated from Plate Flanged Reducer Swaged Flanged Reducer with a Flanged - Eccentric from Pipe Eccentric Connection
EPFL
4.8 5.6
1.5
10
1,2
ESFL
4.8 5.6
1.5
10
1,2
OTFL
4.8 5.6
1,2
1.5
3 10 9 2
Reducer - Eccentric with a Connection Fabricated from Plate Flanged
EZFL
4.8 5.6
1,2
1.5
3 10 9 2
Reducer with a Swaged Flanged
Eccentric Connection from Pipe
EXFL
4.8 5.6
1,2
1.5
3 10 9 2
Notes: 1. Generic type REDU has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers. If the connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a p-arrive, a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side. If the connection facility is to be used, P3 will be the connection p-point and as such must have valid bore and orientation data for the connection. As the flat side can be either in the same direction as the connection or directly opposite, a P9 p-point must be used to give the orientation of the flat side. 2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point will be shown on the isometric.
3:29
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.15
SHU Symbol Keys

Component Description Non-Category Item NC**
4.5
SKEY
Plotted Symbol
6.5
P-points
Note 1,2
1 0
Notes: 1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwed PL for plain 2. SHU elements have a CRFA attribute allowing up to 10 connection points.
3.16
TEE or OLET Symbol Keys

Component Description Olet - Half Coupling e.g. Screwed (Picture shows screwed but can be any connection type) Olet - Half Coupling e.g. Socket Weld SKEY HC**
) (
3.0
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
) (
3.0
1 0 2
HC**
) (
3.0
) (
3.0
1 0 2
Olet - Latrolet e.g. Butt Weld
LA**
3.2
3
) (
) (
4.8
1 0 2
3:30
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Olet - Latrolet e.g. Screwed
SKEY LA**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
3.2
) (
) (
4.8
1 0 2
Olet - Latrolet e.g. Socket Weld
LA**
3.2
3
) (
) (
4.8
1 0 2
Olet - Nipolet e.g. Screwed
NI**
1.0
3
5.0
1 0 2
) (
3.5
) (
Olet - Nipolet e.g. Plain Ended
NI**
5.0
1.0
3
) (
4.0
) (
1 0 2
Olet - Sockolet
SK**
4.0
()
5.5
) (
1 0 2
Olet - Sweepolet
SW**
4.0
()
5.5
) (
1 0 2
Olet - Thredolet
TH**
3.5
3
1 0 2
4.0
) (
5.5
) (
3:31
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Olet - Weldolet
SKEY WT**
Plotted Symbol
3.5
P-points
Note
1 0 2
4.0
) (
5.5
) (
Olet - Instrument Flanged
ITFL
5.5
3 1 0 2
8.0
5.0
Tee - Butt Weld
TEBW
) (
VARIABLE ANGLE
2,3
3 1 0 2
) (
VARIABLE ANGLE
Tee - Compression
TECP
) (
2,3
3 1 0 2
) (
VARIABLE ANGLE
Tee - Flanged
TEFL
2,3
3 1 0 2
Tee - Screwed
TESC
) (
VARIABLE ANGLE 3
2,3
1 0 2
) (
VARIABLE ANGLE
Tee - Set-on
TESO
) (
1,2
3
) (
VARIABLE ANGLE
1 0 2
Tee - Set-on Reinforced
TERF
REINFORCED
1,2
3
) (
) (
1 0 2
3:32
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Tee - Pulled
SKEY TPUL
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,2
VARIABLE ANGLE 3
) (
) (
VARIABLE ANGLE
1 0 2
Tee - Socket Weld
TESW
) (
2,3
3 1 0 2
) (
Tee - Swept Branch Butt Weld
TSBW
() ) (
3 1 0 2
Tee - Swept Branch Flanged
TSFL
3 1 0 2
Tee - Swept Branch Compression
TSCP
() ) (
3 1 0 2
Tee - Swept Branch Socket Weld
TSSW
() ) (
VARIABLE ANGLE
2
3 1 0 2
Tee - Generic Y-type with variable angle outand offlegs
Y@**
4,5,6
3 1 0 2
VARIABLE ANGLE
Notes: 1. The position of P3 along the perpendicular axis is important for deriving the cut pipe length. The perpendicular displacement of P3 is determined by the point at which the offline leg intersects the main line. For TESO and TERF, the distance P0 to P3 must not exceed half the main bore; P0, P1, P2 and P3 will be coincident when the offline leg has the same bore as the main line. For TPUL, the distance P0 to P3 must exceed half the main bore. If the position of P3 does not follow these rules, any weld shown at the intersection may appear in the wrong place. 2. The dimensions of piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm. 3. The TEBW, TECP, TEFL, TESC and TESW SKEYs can be used for laterals.
3:33
12.0

Symbol Keys
4. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwed PL for plain 5. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the range 1 to 3, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned to the largest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for Y1**, Y2** or Y3**. 6. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on the tube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and flanged representation on the component cannot be enforced.
3.17
TRAP Symbol Keys

Component Description Trap - In Line (Straight Through) SKEY TI**
4.5
Plotted Symbol
8.0
P-points
Note 2
10
Trap - Angle
TA**
4.0
9.25
1
8.0
0 2
1,2
4.5
Trap - Offset
TO**
6.0 8.0
8.0
0 1 2 3
1,3
Trap - Return
TR**
5.0
2 3 0 1
1,4
21.5
26.0
Notes: 1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged
3:34
12.0

Symbol Keys
SC for screwed PL for plain 2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram:
P0 P2
P1
P1
P0
P3 Side
P2
P3 must not have a valid bore. It is used only to obtain correct orientation of the element. P3 can be orientated in PARAGON. Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be coplanar. 4. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram:
3:35
12.0

Symbol Keys
P2
P3 P0 P1
Note: That the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and P3) may be coincident.
3.18
UNIO Symbol Keys

Component Description Union - Screwed SKEY UNSC
2.5
Plotted Symbol
5.5
P-points
Note
10
Union - Socket Weld
UNSW
2.5
5.5
10
3.19
UNIVERSAL Symbol Key

Component Description Universal key for generic type PCOM Notes: 1. Radius of circle is controlled by percentage scale factor attribute, SkeyScale, on SDTE element (100% = 10mm). Symbol also has a line from circumference to each connection point. 2. UNIV Skey implies no end connection information. To flag end connections, the PSkey on each p-point must be set to one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SKEY UNIV
10 mm
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,2
3:36
12.0

Symbol Keys
SC for screwed PL for plain (default if unset)
3.20
VALV Symbol Keys

Component Description Valve - Angle SKEY AV**
4.0 8.0
Plotted Symbol
9.25
P-points
Note 1,2
03 2
4.75
Valve - Angle Pressure Reducing
AX**
4.0
9.25
1,2
8.0
03 2
4.75
Valve - Angle Relief/ Vent
AR**
4.0
9.25
1,2
8.0
03 2
4.75
Valve - Ball
VB**
9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
4.0
3.0
Valve - Basic
VV**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve - Butterfly
VY**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve - Check
VC**
4.0 9.25
1,2
3:37
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Valve - Check
SKEY CK**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,2
4.0 9.0
Valve - Cock
VK**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve - Diaphragm
VD**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve - Gate
VT**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve - Globe
VG**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve - Needle
VN**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve - Plug
VP**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Valve Reducing
Pressure
VX**
4.0 9.25 2.5
1,2
1 0 3 2
3:38
12.0

Symbol Keys
Component Description Valve - Relief/Vent
SKEY VR**
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,2
4.0 9.25
0 3
Valve - Slide
VS**
4.0 9.25
1 0 3 2
1,2
Notes: 1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwed PL for plain 2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, then ISODRAFT will output the orientation of this p-point unless it is oriented in a primary direction (X, Y, Z etc.)
3.21
VENT Symbol Keys

Component Description Rupture Disk SKEY RD Plotted Symbol P-points Note
2.5 7.75
10
3.22
VFWA Symbol Keys

Component Description Valve - 4 Way SKEY V4**
4.0 8.0 4.5
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,2
9.25
3 1 0 5 4 2
3:39
12.0

Symbol Keys
Notes: 1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwed PL for plain 2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-point will be shown on the isometric.
3.23
VTWA Symbol Keys

Component Description Valve - 3 Way SKEY V3**
4.0 8.0
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note 1,2
9.25
04 1 3 2
4.5
Notes: 1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition identifiers: BW for butt weld CP for compression SW for socket weld FL for flanged SC for screwed PL for plain 2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-point will be shown on the isometric.
3:40
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.24
WELD Symbol Keys

Component Description Weld - Site SKEY WS
4.0 4.0
1 0 2
Plotted Symbol
P-points
Note
Weld - Field Fitted
WF
4.0
FFW
1 0 2
4.0
Weld - Shop
WW
1 0 2
3.25
Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol

Component Description Pipe passing through floor SKEY FLOR Plotted Symbol Note 1,2,3
Notes: 1. Same rules apply as those used for positioning the FLOW ARROW symbol (see In-line Components, Including Straight-through Valves in the ISODRAFT User Guide). 2. Must only be positioned in vertical sections of pipeline. 3. ISODRAFT will automatically orientate the fitting shape to suit the up/down direction of the pipeline.
3:41
12.0

Symbol Keys
3.26
Welded Lug Symbol Keys

Component Description Welded Circular Lug SKEY WLC
5.0
Plotted Symbol
1.0
P-points
Note
) (
4.0
) (
1 0 2
Welded Lug
Rectangular
WLR
5.0
1.0
3
) (
4.0
) (
1 0 2
3.27
Symbol Key Reference Index

This section lists all available symbol keys (SKEYs) in alphabetic order. Cross-references are given to the generic component types (GTYPEs) under which you will find them described in the preceding sections of this appendix (if appropriate). Each SKEY has an indication of whether or not it may be redefined, as explained in the ISODRAFT User Guide, Section 11.1, The Basic Principles. For components which include spindles, the standard spindle type associated with the predefined SKEY is indicated, see the ISODRAFT User Guide Section 11.3, Special Keys, for illustrations of these spindle types. SKEY AR** AV** AX** BA** BEFL BO** BR** BTFL BU+D BUFL C3** C4** GTYPE VALV VALV VALV PCOM BEND PCOM PCOM BEND BEND BEND INST INST COMPONENT Angled Pressure Reducing Valve Angled Valve Angled Relief Valve or Vent Angle Block Flanged Bend Offset Block Return Block Flanged Bend with Tee Pulled Return Bend Flanged Return Bend 3-Way Control Valve 4-Way Control Valve USER DEFINABLE? Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No No No 13SP 13SP SPINDLE TYPE 09SP 01SP 02SP
3:42
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY CA** CEBW CESC CESW CH** CK** COCP COSC COSW CPBW CPFL CRBW CRCP CRFL CRRF CRSC CRSO CRSW CSBW CSFL CTBW CTFL CTSC CTSW CV** CXBW CXFL
GTYPE INST COUP COUP COUP PCOM VALV COUP COUP COUP REDU REDU CROS CROS CROS CROS CROS CROS CROS REDU REDU REDU REDU REDU REDU INST REDU REDU
COMPONENT Angled Control Valve Butt Weld Elbolet Screwed Fitting Elbolet Socket Weld Elbolet Hose Coupling Check Valve Compression Fitting Coupling Screwed Fitting Coupling Socket Weld Coupling Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Flanged Concentric Reducer Butt Weld Cross Compression Fitting Cross Flanged Cross Set On Reinforced Cross Screwed Fitting Cross Set On Cross Socket Weld Cross Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Flanged Concentric Reducer
USER DEFINABLE? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No
SPINDLE TYPE 13SP
No No Yes Yes
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes with Tee Flanged Concentric Reducer with Yes Tee Screwed Fitting Concentric with Yes Tee Socket Weld Concentric Reducer Yes with Tee Control Valve Yes 13SP
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes with Tee Flanged Concentric Reducer with Yes Tee
3:43
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY CZBW CZFL DR EBSC ELBW ELCP ELSC ELSW EPBW EPFL ER** ESBW ESFL ETBW ETCP ETSC ETSW EUBW EX** EXBW EXFL EZBW EZFL FA** FI** FLBL FLBL
GTYPE REDU REDU INST ELBO ELBO ELBO ELBO ELBO REDU REDU ELBO REDU REDU ELBO ELBO ELBO ELBO ELBO PCOM REDU REDU REDU REDU FILT FILT FLAN FBLI
COMPONENT
USER DEFINABLE?
SPINDLE TYPE
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes with Tee Flanged Concentric Reducer with Yes Tee Rupture Disc Screwed Fitting (Male) Elbow Butt Weld Elbow Compression Fitting Elbow Screwed Fitting Elbow Socket Weld Elbow Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Flanged Eccentric Reducer Reducing Elbow Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Flanged Eccentric Reducer Butt Weld Elbow with Tee Yes No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
Compression Fitting Elbow with No Tee Screwed Fitting Elbow with Tee Socket Weld Elbow with Tee Butt Weld Return Elbow Expansion Bellows No No No Yes
Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer with Yes Tee Flanged Eccentric Reducer with Yes Tee Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer with Yes Tee Flanged Eccentric Reducer with Yes Tee Angled Filter Straight-Through (In-Line) Filter Blind or Blanking Flange Blind or Blanking Flange No Yes Yes Yes
3:44
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY FLFL FLLB FLOW FLRC FLRC FLRE FLRE FLRG FLOR FLSC FLSE FLSJ FLSW FLSO FLWN FO** FOSO FOWN FPFL FPPL FR** FT** FX** H3** H4** HA** HC** HC** HV** IA** IDFL
GTYPE FLAN FLAN
COMPONENT Flared Flange Loose Backing Flange Flow Arrow
USER DEFINABLE? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SPINDLE TYPE
FLAN FBLI FLAN FBLI LJSE ATTA FLAN LJSE FLAN FLAN FLAN FLAN FILT FLAN FLAN FTUB FTUB FILT PCOM PCOM INST INST INST OLET OLET INST INST INST
Reducing Flange Reducing Flange Eccentric Reducing Flange Eccentric Reducing Flange Lap Joint Ring Floor Penetration Type ATTA Screwed Fitting Flange Lap Joint Stub End Slip-on J-Type Welded Flange Socket Weld Flange Slip-on Flange Weld Neck Flange Offset Filter Slip-on Flange with Orifice Weld Neck Flange with Orifice
Fixed Length Pipe with Flanged No Ends Fixed Length Pipe with Plain Ends Yes Return Filter Flame Trap Flexible Hose 3-Way Control Valve 4-Way Control Valve Angled Control Valve Screwed Half Coupling Socket Weld Half Coupling Control Valve Angled Instrument Flanged Instrument with Dial No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 12SP 12SP 12SP 12SP
3:45
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY IDPL II** IO** IR** ITFL KABW KACP KASC KASW L@BW L@FL LA** LA** LA** M3** M4** MA** MIBW MIFL MTBW MTFL MV** NBSC NC** NC** NI** NI** NRSC OP OTBW OTFL
GTYPE INST INST INST INST OLET CAP CAP CAP CAP BEND BEND OLET OLET OLET INST INST INST BEND BEND BEND BEND INST COUP PCOM SHU OLET OLET COUP INST REDU REDU
COMPONENT Instrument with Dial Instrument Offset Instrument Return Instrument Flanged Instrument Tee Butt Weld Cap Compression Fitting Cap Screwed Fitting Cap Socket Weld Cap Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend Flanged Lobster Back Bend Butt Weld Latrolet Screwed Fitting Latrolet Socket Weld Latrolet 3-Way Motorised Valve 4-Way Motorised Valve Angled Control Valve Butt Weld Mitred Bend Flanged Mitred Bend Butt Weld Mitred Bend with Tee Flanged Mitred Bend with Tee Motorised Valve Screwed Nipple Non-Category Item Non-Category Item Plain End Nipolet Screwed Fitting Nipolet Screwed Fitting Nipple Orifice Plate
USER DEFINABLE? No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SPINDLE TYPE
11SP
11SP
11SP
Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer with Yes Tee Flanged Eccentric Reducer with Yes Tee
3:46
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY OTSC PB+D PF PL PV PR RA** RBSC RBSW RCBW RCCP RCFL RCSC RCSW RD REBW REFL RESC RF RNSC RP RV** S3** S4** SA** SB SG**
GTYPE REDU BEND CLOS PCOM CLOS INST INST REDU REDU REDU REDU REDU REDU REDU VENT REDU REDU REDU REDU REDU PCOM INST INST INST INST PCOM PCOM
COMPONENT
USER DEFINABLE?
SPINDLE TYPE
Screwed Fitting Eccentric Reducer Yes with Tee Pulled Bend Fixed Length Pipe Block Plug Variable Length Pipe Block Restrictor Plate Angled Relief Valve Screwed Fitting Reducing Bush No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Concentric Yes 02SP
Socket Weld Concentric Reducing Yes Bush Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes
Compression Fitting Concentric Yes Reducer Flanged Concentric Reducer Screwed Reducer Fitting Yes
Concentric Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Socket Weld Concentric Reducer Rupture Disc Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Flanged Eccentric Reducer
Screwed Fitting Eccentric Reducer Yes Special Reducing Flange Nipple Fitting Concentric Reducer Restrictor Plate Relief Valve Yes Yes Yes Yes 10SP 10SP 10SP
3-Way Control Valve with Square No Indicator 4-Way Control Valve with Square No Indicator Angled Control Valve with Square Yes Indicator Spectacle Blind Sight Glass Yes Yes
3:47
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY SK** SP SR SV** SW** T@BW T@FL TA** TB+D TEBW TECP TEFL TESC TESO TERF TESW TH** TI** TO** TR** TPUL TSBW TSCP TSFL TSSW TU** UNSC UNSW
GTYPE OLET PCOM PCOM INST OLET BEND BEND TRAP BEND TEE TEE TEE TEE TEE TEE TEE OLET TRAP TRAP TRAP TEE TEE TEE TEE TEE PCOM UNIO UNIO
COMPONENT Socket Weld Sockolet Slip Plate Slip Ring Control Valve Indicator with
USER DEFINABLE? Yes Yes Yes Square Yes Yes
SPINDLE TYPE
10SP
Butt Weld Sweepolet
Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend with No Tee Flanged Lobster Back Bend with No Tee Angled Trap Pulled Bend with Tee Butt Weld Tee Compression Fitting Tee Flanged Tee Screwed Fitting Tee Set On Tee Reinforced Tee Socket Weld Tee Screwed Fitting Thredolet In-line Trap Offset Trap Return Trap Pulled Tee Butt Weld Swept Tee Compression Fitting Swept Tee Flanged Swept Tee Socket Weld Swept Tee Tundish or Funnel Screwed Fitting Union Socket Weld Union No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes
3:48
12.0

Symbol Keys
SKEY UNIV
GTYPE PCOM
COMPONENT Universal Skey for special fittings
USER DEFINABLE? See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes
SPINDLE TYPE
V3** V4** VB** VC** VD** VG** VK** VN** VP** VR** VS** VT** VV** VX** VY** WF WS WTBW WW XA** XV** X@** Y@** 01HG
VTWA VFWA VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV VALV WELD WELD OLET WELD INST INST CROS TEE
3-Way Valve 4-Way Valve Ball Valve Check Valve Diaphragm Valve Globe Valve Cock Valve Needle Valve Plug Valve Relief Valve Slide Valve Gate Valve Basic Valve Pressure Reducing Valve Butterfly Valve Field Fitted Weld Site Weld Butt Weld Weldolet Shop Weld Angled Pressure Reducing Valve Pressure Reducing Valve
01SP 01SP 03SP
01SP 01SP 03SP 06SP 07SP 02SP 08SP 05SP 01SP 09SP 03SP
09SP 09SP
Generic Y-type Cross with user- Yes definable out- and offlegs Generic Y-type Tee with user- Yes definable out- and offlegs Hanger (As a basis for user- Yes defined hangers; see ISODRAFT User Guide, Section 10.4, Defining a New Hanger)
3:49
12.0

Symbol Keys
Note: ** denotes any of the following connection types: BW CP FL SC SW PL Butt Weld Compression Fitting Flange Screwed Fitting Socket Weld Plain
in Bends, denotes the number of bend segments (range 1-9) in X-type and Y-type Crosses/Tees, replaced by an integer in the range 1 to 4, 1 indicating the largest bore, 4 indicating the smallest bore.
denotes the ratio of the bend radius to the pipe bore (range 1-9)
3:50
12.0

Alternative Texts
4
4.1
Alternative Texts
Introduction
You can change or remove all the text on isometric drawings using the ATEXT command. This appendix lists the default settings of the text phrases, with their reference numbers. The alternative texts (Atexts) have been broken down under the following headings: Isometric Drawing Area Title Block Area Plotted Material List Line Summary Area Printed Material List Weld Box Summary Bend Table Dynamic Detail Areas Bolt Report
If an Atext is made blank, any additional information that may have been drawn in or appended to the corresponding area will be suppressed.
4.2
Isometric Drawing Area

201 E 202 N 203 W 204 S 205 EL + 206 EL - 207 NS 208 CONN. TO Denotes east in coordinates Denotes north in coordinates Denotes west in coordinates Denotes south in coordinates Denotes a positive elevation in coordinates (up) Denotes a negative elevation in coordinates (down) Denotes a pipes nominal size (bore) Denotes CONNected TO, where a pipe end is connected to a nozzle
4:1
12.0

Alternative Texts
209 CONT. ON 210 F 211 G 212 B 213 SPINDLE 214 MM 215 REDUCING FLANGE 216 OFFSET
Denotes CONTinued ON, where a pipe is continued on another drawing sheet. See also Atext 276. Denotes a flange (used as the material list pointer for flanges) Denotes a gasket (used as the material list pointer for gaskets) Denotes a bolt (used as the material list pointer for bolts) Used to show the spindle direction of a valve when it is not a primary direction Denotes millimetres (used at angle valves etc.) Message pointing to any reducing flange Message used where an offset occurs. For example, at eccentric reducers, offset reducing flanges, offset blocks etc. Denotes a lap joint stub end (used as the material list pointer for LJSEs) Denotes mitre-type bend (see also Atext 231) Denotes lobster-type bend (see also Atext 231) Message pointing to any reinforced tee (symbol key TERF) Message pointing to any flange where attribute LOOSE is set to TRUE Message pointing to any field-fitted weld (symbol key WF) Denotes a falling pipeline. If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the symbol for falling lines specified in degrees Used for falling lines specified as a ratio (e.g. 1:10) If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the % symbol for falling lines specified as a percentage Used for falling lines specified in grads Used for falling lines specified in metric units, to indicate millimetres per metre Used for falling lines specified in imperial units, to indicate inches per foot Message pointing to any open ended pipe whose HCON or TCON is set to SCRD Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to VENT
279 L 217 MITRE 218 LOBSTER 219 REINFORCED 220 LEFT LOOSE 221 FFW 222 FALL 223 224 : 225 226 GRAD 227 PER M 228 PER FT 229 SCREWED END 230 VENT
4:2
12.0

Alternative Texts
231 BEND 236 S 237 238 239 DRAIN 240
Associated with Atexts 217 and 218. Denotes that a support exists at a component. Indicates inches Indicates feet Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to DRAN This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce a message at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to OPEN. This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce a message at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to CLOS. This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce a message at any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is not one of the recognised ends; i.e. not SCRD, VENT, DRAN, OPEN or CLOS. This Atext is blank by default. If it is set to any word (e.g. FLAT), eccentric reducers will have the orientation of their flat side indicated by that word. Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247, 248 and 249. See also the note following Atext 283. For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283 For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283 For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283 For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283 For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283 For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283 Message pointing to any tee whose symbol key is TSBW Denotes CONTinued FROM, where a pipe is continued from another drawing sheet. See also Atext 255 in Title Block Area. Message pointing to orifice flanges Message pointing to instrument dials (symbol keys IDPL and IDFL) Message pointing to orifice plates Message pointing to spectacle blinds and slip plates Message pointing to sight glasses
241
242
243
244 UP 245 DOWN 246 NORTH 247 SOUTH 248 EAST 249 WEST 275 SWEPT TEE 276 CONT. FROM
277 ORIFICE FLANGE 278 DIAL FACE 280 TAPPING 281 TAIL 282 WINDOW
4:3
12.0

Alternative Texts
283 FLAT
Used to indicate the orientation of the flat side of an eccentric reducer when the reducer is skewed. Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247, 248 and 249. See also the following note. Message pointing to bends that have an offline leg This Atext is blank by default. If it is set, a message will be output at screwed erection fittings. Shows the orientation of a skewed olet which has nothing, or only a plug, attached. Used on system isometrics to show the position(s) of any change of Pipe reference. Message pointing to any place in the pipe where the specification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see the SPECBREAK command). The names of the old and new specifications are automatically included. (See also Atext 232.) Message pointing to any place in the pipe where the specification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see the SPECBREAK command). The names of the old and new specifications are automatically included. Message pointing to any place in the pipe where the specification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see the SPECBREAK command). The names of the old and new specifications are automatically included. Message pointing to any place in the pipe where the specification changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see the SPECBREAK command). The names of the old and new specifications are automatically included. Message pointing to elbows that have an offline leg Shows radius of pulled bend in multiples of the pipe diameter Shows radius of pulled bend in current distance units (mm or inch) Used as a heading for personnel protection insulation. Message pointing to reducing elbows. Note that this text is also used on the Material List. Shows the orientation of a skewed fabricated tee which has nothing connected. Message showing imperial fall accuracy.
284 TEE BEND 286 287 ORIENTATION DIRECTION 288 PIPE 289 MATL
290 INSUL
291 TRACE
292 PAINT
298 TEE ELBOW 337 D BEND RADIUS 338 BEND RADIUS 349 PP 350 REDUCING ELBOW 454 CONNECTION ORIENTATION 477 PER 10 FT
4:4
12.0

Alternative Texts
478 PER 100 FT 451 TAPPING COORDINATES
Message showing imperial fall accuracy. Shows coordinates of tapping points for offline legs on userdefined multiway PCOMs
Note: Atext 243 produces the flat side message for reducers in orthogonal piping and Atext 283 is used for reducers in non-orthogonal piping. ISODRAFT indicates the flat side of an eccentric reducer by default only when the reducer is skewed. By using Atexts 243 and 283, you may have the flat side indicated, or not, for skewed-only or all reducers. 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 BEAM $? COLUMN $? ? $BUILDING CL CL EQUIPMENT $? CL PIPELINE $? ? $FLOOR LEVEL ? $WALL GRID LINE $? ?
Text for reference dimensions. On the plot, $ is replaced by a new line, and ? is replaced by the name of the element or one of its parents.
4.3
Title Block Area

250 DATE The actual date is appended automatically in the required format (see DATE). This Atext also uses Atexts 258 to 269, inclusive, if the date format is set to UK. Used if the project number is to be plotted (see PROJECTNUMBER) The PDMS zone name is appended automatically The value of the attribute SPEC from the element PIPE is appended automatically The value of the attribute REV (i.e. the revision level) from the element PIPE is appended automatically Used only when a pipe is split over multiple drawing sheets. This Atext is used in conjunction with Atext 256 (in the format DRG 1 OF 2) or with Atext 276 (in the format CONT. FROM DRG 1).
251 PROJECT NO 252 BATCH REF 253 PIPING SPEC 254 ISS 255 DRG
4:5
12.0

Alternative Texts
256 OF 257 SPL 258 JAN 259 FEB 260 MAR 261 APR 262 MAY 263 JUN 264 JUL 265 AUG 266 SEP 267 OCT 268 NOV 269 DEC 270 THERMAL INSULATION SPEC 271 TRACING SPEC 272 PAINTING SPEC
Used in conjunction with Atext 255 Denotes a SPOOL drawing. Sequential numbering, starting at 1 for each pipe, is appended automatically. 258 JAN to 269 DEC All used in conjunction with Atext 250 (for UK date formats)
The value of the attribute ISPE of the element PIPE is appended automatically The value of the attribute TSPE of the element PIPE is appended automatically The value of the attribute PTSP of the element PIPE is appended automatically
4.4
Plotted Material List

300 FABRICATION MATERIALS 310 ERECTION MATERIALS 301 PT 302 NO 303 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 304 N.S. 305 ITEM CODE 306 QTY 307 PIPE 308 FITTINGS The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set to TRUE and for pipe selected from a specification with a ?SHOP set to TRUE The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set to FALSE and for pipe selected from a specification with no ?SHOP or with a ?SHOP set to FALSE The part number pointer, used in conjunction with Atext 302 Used in conjunction with Atext 301 The sub-heading for the item description column Denotes nominal size (bore) of a pipe or component The sub-heading for the item code column Denotes quantity The sub-heading under which pipe is listed The sub-heading under which pipe fittings (elbows, tees etc.) are listed
4:6
12.0

Alternative Texts
309 FLANGES 311 GASKETS 312 BOLTS 313 VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS 314 INSTRUMENTS 315 SUPPORTS 339 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS 316 PIPE SPOOLS 319 CUT PIPE LENGTHS 320 PIECE 321 NO 322 CUT
The sub-heading under which flanges are listed The sub-heading under which gaskets are listed The sub-heading under which bolts are listed The sub-heading under which valves and in-line items are listed The sub-heading under which instruments are listed The sub-heading under which supports are listed The sub-heading under which additional items are listed The sub-heading under which spool numbers are listed The heading under which cut pipe lengths are listed The sub-heading to Atext 319 which identifies individual cut pipe lengths. Used in conjunction with Atext 321. Used in conjunction with Atext 320 The sub-heading to Atext 319 which indicates the actual lengths of the cut pipes listed. Used in conjunction with Atext 323 Used in conjunction with Atext 322 The sub-heading to Atext 319 under which Atexts 326, 327, or 328 will be listed if applicable Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a pulled bend Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a loose flange Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a fitted field weld Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to the item code when one end of a fixed length spool has a special flange Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to the description. Used in conjunction with Atext 334. Used as a heading for material lists in equipment trim isometrics Used as a subheading for each group of components related to a particular Nozzle in an equipment trim MTO list Indicates that the listing for a Nozzle in an equipment trim isometric is continued from a previous drawing sheet
323 LENGTH 324 REMARKS 326 PLD BEND 327 LOOSE FLG 328 FF WELD 334 S
335 WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO) 341 EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS 342 NOZZLE REF - 343 CONTINUED
4:7
12.0

Alternative Texts
345 AND 346 GEARBOX ORIENTATION 347
Used to separate parts of an equipment trim MTO list between connected Nozzles Used for all valves created with a P11 to show the orientation of P11 This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at the bottom of the material list on the master drawing to show that the information is continued on another sheet. If it is defined, it will override the standard Atexts 209, 255 and 256. This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at the top of the material list on an overflow drawing to show that the information is continued on another sheet. If it is defined, it will override the standard Atexts 276, 255 and 256. The subheading under which reducing elbows are listed. Note that this text is also used in the drawing area. The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or material list for tube pieces including pulled tee. The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or material list for tube pieces including set-on tee. This Atext is used in headings to show the spool number. This Atext is used in headings for components which are not included in any spool.
348
350 REDUCING ELBOW 377 PLD TEE 378 SETON TEE 480 SPOOL 481 NO SPOOL
4.5
Line Summary Area

The symbol identification texts that are used in the line summary area, along the bottom of the isometric drawing, can be changed or made blank. If one of these Atexts is changed, the corresponding symbol will still be drawn. If the Atext is made blank, the corresponding symbol will not be drawn in the line summary area. The following texts are all used as explanatory captions for the examples of drawing symbols used on the isometrics.
400 TRACED PIPE 401 LAGGED PIPE 402 PIPE SUPPORT 403 COMPN JOINT 404 SCREWED JOINT 405 SOCKET WELD 406 FIELD WELD 407 SHOP WELD 411 SITE CONNECTION The following Atexts also appear in the line summary area:
4:8
12.0

Alternative Texts
317 PIPE NS
Used in conjunction with Atext 318. The total centre line length for each bore is calculated automatically and listed against this caption. Used, in conjunction with Atext 317, to summarise centre line lengths
1
318 CL LENGTH
410 [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO
DENOTES PARTS LIST NO
A standard explanatory note 408 Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory text in the line summary area. For example:
ATEXT 408 PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3 x NOMINAL PIPE BORE

409 Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory text in the line summary area. For example:
ATEXT 409 ALL FLANGES 150 LB RATING UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE
4.6
Printed Material List

The Atexts that are used in the printed material list only are: 329 M 330 INS 331 MM 332 PAGE 333 PIPELINE REF 336 SYSTEM REF Denotes metres Denotes inches Denotes millimetres A page number is appended automatically The pipe name is appended automatically Used to identify system isometrics. The system name is appended automatically.
4.7
Weld Box Summary

The Atexts used in the weld box summary are as follows:
412 WELD |SHOP |WELD |WELDER |VISUAL 413 NO |/FLD |PROC ID
|NDT |HARD S.R | NO |
|FAB.QA |ACCEPT
|ACCEPT |NO
Note: The vertical lines (|) shown in these examples are an essential part of the Atext and must be input at the keyboard with the required text. The positioning of these lines determines the output format.
4:9
12.0

Alternative Texts
4.8
Bend Table
The Atexts below are all titles of columns in the bend table: 470 PT NO 471 NB 472 A 473 B 474 C 475 ANGLE 476 RADIUS Part Number. Nominal Bore. Dimension A. Dimension B. Dimension C. The bend angle. The bend radius.
4.9
Dynamic Detail Areas

479 DETAIL This Atext is used to label items shown in separate detail plots, and also as headings for the detail plots themselves.
4.10
Bolt Report
The Atexts below are used in the Bolt Report titles: 325 LENGTH 351 FAB 352 EREC 353 BOLT DESCRIPTION 455 POSITIONS WRT
4:10
12.0

Material Control File
5
5.1

Introduction
The Material Control File is an ASCII file which contains a record of all materials incorporated into the isometric drawing, including piping components, tube, bolts, etc. It can be used to pass details of material requirements to an external material control program. A Material Control File is produced for each ISODRAW DETAIL command. The file generated during a multiple plot run contains material records for all pipelines detailed by that command.
5.2
Creating a Material Control File

To create a basic material control file, use the command:
MATControl
filename
where filename is the name of a file in the operating system directory. If a file of the given name exists, new data will be added to the end of it. If filename does not exist, a new file is created. The format of the material control file is described in File Format. You can create a more detailed material control file by using the EXTENDED command as follows:
MATControl
filename EXTended
The extended material control file contains the information contained in the basic material control file (see File Format), plus the following: Part numbers (in word 8 of component records) Item descriptions (as record -21) File header with: -5 record (originating program/version) -3 record (title block information)
Note: Always delete files once the data has been transferred to the external material control system, to avoid wasting disk space.
5.3
File Format
The data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated record of the quantity of each type of component for each pipeline drawing.
5:1
12.0

Each pipeline record sequence begins with a general header, which includes references and specifications applicable to the pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed breakdown of the individual items. The codes used to identify the records are defined in the following sections. The definitions may be understood more easily by referring to the example in Example of a Material Control File Output, bearing in mind that only relevant records occur in any given case.
5.3.1
Overall File Structure

The general file header record sequence may be summarised as follows:
Record No. -5 -3
Contents Originating program(s) Title block information
The overall record sequence for each pipeline may be summarised as shown below.
5:2
12.0

Record No. -6 to -19 50 60
Contents
Pipeline header information
(see Section B.3)
Spool count plus drawing number/number of drawings Centreline length summary by nominal size (bore) (including a dimensional units indicator). For any sheet containing more than six bores, addititional type 60 records will be written. The multiple type 60 records will be consecutive in the file. Tube Item Code Description Fitting (Fabrication type) Item Code Description Flange Item Code Gasket Item Code Description Bolt Item Code Description Valve or other in-line component Item Code Instrument Item Code Description Support Item Code Description Miscellaneous Item Code Description Miscellaneous Item Code Description Next pipeline header information etc. Next pipeline information and fittings etc. Records for individual parts list items (see Section B.3)
100 -20 -21 200 -20 -21 300 -20 400 -20 -21 500 -20 -21 600 -20 700 -20 -21 800 -20 -21 900 -20 -21 1000 -20 -21 -6 to -19 50 to 1000
(NOTE: only those categories which actually occur in the pipeline will be listed)
Repeats for any number of pipelines or drawings Repeats for any number of pipelines or drawings
5.3.2
Material Control File Record Identification Numbers

The file section relating to each pipeline or drawing begins with a general header (records coded -6 to -19) and continues with a separate record for each specific category of information. A detailed breakdown of the information format for each of these categories is given in the next subsection. The meanings of the various record type identification numbers are as follows:
5:3
12.0

Record Contents No. -1 -3 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -19 -20 -21 -25 -29 50 60 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Overflow text record (used with all types of text records) Titleblock information Once per file Originating program Pipeline reference (name or refno) User-defined spool prefix identifier Revision identifier (i.e. issue number) Project identifier (i.e. project number) Batch reference (Zone or Area name) Piping specification reference Nominal pressure rating (class) Line type identifier Date of data transfer Insulation specification reference Tracing specification reference Painting specification reference Pipeline operating temperature Item Code Item Description System Isometric reference Equipment trim reference Number of spools plus drawing identification Centreline length summary Tube Fittings (fabrication type) Flanges Gaskets Bolts Valves and other in-line components Instruments Supports Miscellaneous Miscellaneous
The record formats are as follows (FORTRAN format): Record no. >0: Record no. <0: 14I5 I5, 3X, A13
5.3.3
Individual Formats for Each Type of Information Record

The following tables show the information which is output for each type of record, listed in the word order in which it is output. A word in this context means one specific item of information. The effect of these formats on the output will be most easily seen by studying the output sample listing given in Example of a Material Control File Output. Note: Each type of record has provision for up to 14 words, each word having an integer field of length five. Only the number of words actually used for a particular type of record is listed in the corresponding table. Record Number 50:
5:4
12.0

Spool Count, Drawing Number and Number of Drawings

Word Position Number 1 2 3 Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 50 Set to appropriate number of spools on drawing Used when a pipeline splits onto more than one drawing sheet (e.g. `2' in 2 of 4) Used when a pipeline splits onto more than one drawing sheet (e.g. `4' in 2 of 4)
Field Information
Record type number Number of spools on drawing Drawing number
Number of drawings
Record Number 60: Centreline Length Summary

Word Position Number 1 2 Field Information Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 60 0 = Imperial bores Metric lengths 1 = Imperial bores and lengths 2 = Metric bores and lengths Bores in mm or 1/16th inches Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft Bores in mm or 1/16th inches Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft Bores in mm or 1/16th inches Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft Bores in mm or 1/16th inches Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft Bores in mm or 1/16th inches Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft Bores in mm or 1/16th inches Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
Record type number Dimensional units indicator Units col. = bores Tens col. = bolts
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Nominal bore Centreline length Nominal bore Centreline length Nominal bore Centreline length Nominal bore Centreline length Nominal bore Centreline length Nominal bore Centreline length
Note: Each type 60 record can accommodate up to six sizes of tube (i.e. up to six different nominal bores). If a drawing sheet contains more than six bore sizes, more than one type 60 record will be created. These will be written consecutively to the file. The dimensional units specified by word 2 in record 60 are applicable to all subsequent records up to the next set of header information; i.e. up to the -6 identifier for the next pipeline. Record Number 100: Tube
5:5
12.0

Word Position Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Field Information
Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 100 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Tube lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
Record type number Primary bore Secondary bore Third bore (if required) Quantity/length Fab/Erec marker not used Part number
Record Number 200: Fittings

Word Position Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field Information Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 200 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Set to number of fitting types required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
Record type number Primary bore Secondary bore Third bore (if required) Quantity Fab/Erec marker not used Part number
Record Number 300: Flanges
5:6
12.0

Field Information
Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 300 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Set to number of flanges required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
Record Number 400: Gaskets

Word Position Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field Information Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 400 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Set to number of gaskets required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
Record Number 500: Bolts
5:7
12.0

Field Information
Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 500 Diameters in mm or 1/16th inches
Record type number Bolt diameter

Not used Not used
Quantity Fab/Erec marker Bolt length Part number
Set to number of bolts required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection Bolt lengths in mm
Record Number 600: Valves and In-line Items
Field Information
Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 600 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Set to number of items required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
Record type number Primary bore Secondary bore Third bore (if required) Quantity Fab/Erec marker Not used Part number
Record Number 700: Instruments
5:8
12.0

Field Information
Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 700 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Set to number of instruments required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
Record Number 800: Supports and Hangers

Word Position Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field Information Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 800 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Bores in mm or 1/16 inches Set to number of supports and/or hangers required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
Record Number 900: Miscellaneous Component Record with Unit Quantity
5:9
12.0

Field Information
Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 900 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero
Record type number Component Bore or Bolt Diameter Not used Not used Quantity Fab/Erec marker Bolt Length Part number
Set to number of components required 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection In mm or zero
Record Number 1000: Miscellaneous Component Record with Length Quantity

Word Position Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field Information Comments (inc. range of valid values and purpose if applicable) Set to 1000 Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero
Record type number Component Bore Not used Not used Quantity (Length) Fab/Erec marker Not used Part number
In 1/10 m or 1/10 ft 1 = Fabrication 2 = Erection
5.4
Example of a Material Control File Output

-6 -8 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 50 60 100 -20 100 -20 100 -20 200 -20 200 -20 WTZA601 1 RJK51-> M150 150 WELD 29/01/87 LAG1 2 1 0 96 96 0 PML40 64 0 PML40 16 0 PML80 96 64 REBW 96 0 ELBW
1 73 0 0 0 0 0
0 64 62 60 20 1 1
0 73 1 1 1 1 1
0 16 0 0 0 0 0
0 23 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5:10
12.0

200 ... 300 -20 ... 400 -20 ... 500 -20 ... 600 -20 ...
64
64
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 5 16 1
1 2 2 2 2
0 0 0 76 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
16 0 FMM150SW 64 0 JC150R2 12 0 BM3/4X76 64 VBFL 0
5:11
12.0

5:12
12.0

Error Messages
Error Messages
This appendix lists ISODRAFT error messages that may be output to the screen and message file. Messages generated by ISODRAFT itself have message numbers beginning with 33. Messages generated by the ISODRAW module within ISODRAFT have message numbers beginning with 35. In most cases these will arise only when the program limits have been reached, and you should contact the AVEVA Customer Services Team.
Any other messages that may be output are not described here as they are not specific to ISODRAFT. Note: Many of the messages you will see when using ISODRAFT result from design or cataloguing errors, not from errors in using ISODRAFT. For this reason a data consistency check is strongly advised before ISODRAFT is used. The error messages can include variables, presented in this appendix as follows: integer realno name name/refno filename text (33:1) an integer a real (i.e. non-integer) number an item name (general context) a name of an item (or refno if unnamed) a PDMS filename an alphanumeric character string Paper size A4 to A0 only allowed See the SIZE command. (33:2) ISO 1,2,3,4 only allowed See the ISO command. (33:3) AREA must be between 1 & 10 See the WASTAGE AREA command. (33:110) BAD RETURN FILE The list of pipes successfully detailed by ISODRAW cannot be read. (33:114) VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 1 AND 25 The maximum number of lines permitted in the title block area is 25.
A:1
12.0

Error Messages
(33:116)
VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 201 AND 500 The Atext numbers of texts which can be changed by the ATEXT command must be within the specified range. See Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation for more information on Atexts
(33:121)
PAPER LENGTH must be greater than ZERO This is self-explanatory.
(33:123)
SPEC REF name gives material code ( text ) longer than max of integer characters The itemcode derived from the components name is longer than the width allowed in the itemcode column in the material list (see the ITEMCODE command).
(33:124)
VALUE between 1 & 20 only The identifying number allocated in a KEYS command must be within the specified range.
(33:147)
INST name/refno is not named Itemcodes for instruments are currently defined as PDMS names (probably by default) and an instrument has been found without a name.
(33:149)
SYSTEM ERROR Unable to scan pipe network Check data consistency report and flow directions at branch connections. There is a design inconsistency which prevents ISODRAFT from detailing the specified pipeline. Run a data consistency check to find probable sources of error. In some cases this error may be produced by a configuration which is legal but which cannot currently be scanned by ISODRAFT. This problem can usually be resolved by splitting the pipe into more branches.
(33:150)
BAD NAME/REF A name or reference specified for detailing cannot be accessed.
(33:151)
Too many items in DETAIL list The Detail list cannot contain more than 100 items.
(33:152)
Cant remove NAME/REF A name or reference specified in a Remove list cannot be accessed. In particular, note that World must not occur in a Remove list.
(33:153)
Too many items in REMOVE list The Remove list cannot contain more than 100 items.
(33:155)
The DETAIL list is empty Either there are no items in the Add list or the items specified in the Remove list have completely cancelled out those specified in the Add list, leaving nothing to be detailed.
A:2
12.0

Error Messages
(33:156)
PLOT FILE NAME/PREFIX or TERM have not been specified The output destination (terminal or named file) must be specified before ISODRAFT can detail anything.
(33:157)
NO PIPES HAVE BEEN PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY ISODRAFT has failed to detail any pipes. The reasons may be suggested by other error messages generated during the detailing processes
(33:158)
MORE THAN 100 BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno ISODRAFT cannot cope with more than 100 branches in one pipeline.
(33:159)
NO BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno This is self-explanatory.
(33:160)
name/refno will not be detailed The specified Pipe or Branch cannot be detailed by ISODRAFT. The reason may be found in another message or a data consistency report.
(33:162)
HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same component but head & tail positions are not close enough to that component There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected to the component. This should not normally occur.
(33:163)
HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same component and head & tail positions are the same There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected to the component. This should not normally occur.
(33:164
Component name/refno refers to a BRANCH ( name/refno ) which does not refer back to it
Tee points to branch
Branch head/tail points elsewhere
There is an inconsistency between the connection attribute of the component and the branch to which it refers. For example: (33:165) (33:166) The HEAD of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are not the same The TAIL of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are not the same There is an inconsistency between the HPOS or TPOS attribute of the branch and the p-point of the component to which it should be attached. (33:167) ELEMENT name/refno is not a piping component An element found while detailing a pipe is not of an appropriate type.
A:3
12.0

Error Messages
(33:168)
Cannot find FLANGE to match PPOINT integer of name/refno The connection reference on the given p-point needs to be accessed to determine the bolting requirements. This message means either that the connection reference is unset or invalid, or that a component of type FLAN cannot be found on that connection
(33:169)
Cannot find end of WAFER at name/refno The other end of the wafer fitting at the specified location cannot be found. Connection types commencing with W must be used in pairs.
(33:170) (33:171)
BOLTING BRANCH Table full BOLTING MULTIWAY COMPONENT Table full These tables keep account of those items which have already been accessed for bolting requirements. The limits are 100 items in the Branch Table and 200 items in the Multiway Component Table.
(33:172) (33:173)
No non-standard BOLT lengths for SBOLT name/refno LENGTH is realno No long enough non-standard BOLT lengths for name/refno See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements.
(33:174)
No SPCOM for name/refno The item specified has no component specification from which bolting requirements (the BLTREF attribute) can be derived. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements.
(33:175)
No BOLTS for SPCOM name/refno The SPCOM for the specified item does not have its BLTREF attribute set and so its bolting requirements cannot be determined. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements
(33:176)
Invalid SPCOM name/refno for component, or tube connected to, name/ refno A component, or the implied tube connected directly to it, does not have a valid specification reference (SPRE or LSTU). Check the data consistency report.
(33:177) (33:178)
Cannot get DETAIL info. on SPCOM name/refno Cannot get MATXT info. on SPCOM name/refno These indicate possible cataloguing errors. The SPCOMs specified do not have the appropriate attributes set for the data needed by ISODRAFT. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements.
(33:179)
Reference datum name/refno is unnamed No text will be shown for the reference dimension on the isometric.
A:4
12.0

Error Messages
(33:180)
PWAST attribute from SPCOM name/refno out of range 0.00 - 100.0 The wastage allowance attribute must be set to a percentage figure between 0 and 100%. See the WASTAGE AREA command.
(33:181)
BOLT TABLE FULL The number of different bolts which can be processed in a single pipe is limited to 1000.
(33:182) (33:183) (33:184)
name/refno connected to name/refno but not the other way round name/refno not close enough to name/refno ARRIVE or LEAVE PPOINT greater than 4 ISODRAFT can only deal with 4-way components whose arrive or leave ppoints are not greater than 4.
(33:185) (33:187) (33:188) (33:189)
Multi-way component name/refno is not connected where expected Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH but positions are not the same. Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH and positions are the same. One leg of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are not the same. Errors (33:182) to (33:189) all indicate possible errors in the DESIGN databases. Check the data consistency report and correct errors using a design module.
(33:190) (33:191) (33:192)
CANNOT OPEN OPTIONS WORK FILE : ERROR integer CANNOT OPEN MESSAGE FILE : ERROR integer OPTIONS STATE IS LOST OPTIONS RESTORED TO DEFAULTS These indicate system filing errors, possibly due to a disc overflow. In most cases further explanatory messages will be output.
(33:193)
MESSAGE FILE NOT SET A file for output messages must be specified before ISODRAFT can begin any detailing. See the MESSAGEFILENAME command.
(33:195)
BRANCH name/refno is not in the network A pipe must have all its branches connected to each other in order to be detailed. The branch specified does not appear to be connected in this way.
(33:196)
name/refno has already been detailed The Pipe or Branch specified has its Detail Flag set to TRUE. It may be detailed by using the MARK IGNORE ON option, or by resetting the DETA attribute to FALSE in a design module.
A:5
12.0

Error Messages
(33:197)
SYSTEM WARNING - MATERIAL NAME TABLE OVERFLOW - MAX integer NAMES This could occur on isometrics which incorporate a very large number of different items. It could result in items with the same itemcodes, but with different suffixes, being treated as different items.
(33:198)
ATTACHMENT POINT name/refno HAS NO STEXT An ATTA being used as a comment (ATTY set to CCCC or CCNN) has no text stored in its STEXT attribute.
(33:199)
ERROR IN DETERMINING BOLTING FOR name/refno See Bolting for information on the cataloguing requirements for bolts.
(33:200)
Unable to access PIPE SPEC name/refno A pipe specification referenced by a pipe specified in a detailing command is not accessible in the current MDB.
(33:203)
BAD CONNECTION TO name/refno This suggests a possible error in the HREF or TREF of a branch. Check the data consistency report and rectify errors using a design module.
(33:252)
Unable to locate text text within itemcode The locating text specified in a BOLT LENGTH ITEM INSERT AT text command (see the BOLTING command) cannot be found in the itemcode for a bolt. ISODRAFT will use the default format for this bolt in the itemcode list and outputs this message for information only.
(33:267)
name/refno - Illegal or Inaccessible Reference Datum point The reference dimension is pointing to an incorrect or non-existent element.
(33:268)
Reference datum name/refno - Orientation has been modified to prevent Doubleback Dimension error The reference dimension requested for a Structure is parallel to the centreline. A reasonable orientation has been chosen instead.
(33:269)
Dimension omitted for Reference datum name/refno - Doubleback Dimension The reference dimension requested for a Piping component or Section is parallel to the centreline.
(33:299)
Illegal scale factor found for line flow arrow - default scale 8 used The scale factor for in-line flow arrows must be in the range 5 to 15 inclusive.
(33:331) (33:332)
Illegal HREF connection on BRAN name/refno Illegal TREF connection on BRAN name/refno The Head or Tail Reference of the Branch being detailed is invalid. It may have been deleted, or it may be in a DB which is not current in the MDB.
A:6
12.0

Error Messages
(33:338)
User defined symbol library has not been specified You have tried to define a symbol without first specifying a symbol library file in which to store the definition. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 11, Symbol Keys.
(33:340) (33:341)
Limit of integer user defined symbols exceeded Symbol key text rejected You have tried to define more symbols than the current maximum limit of 300. The specified symbol will not be added to the symbol library. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 11, Symbol Keys.
(33:343)
Error in updating symbol library An existing symbol file cannot be overwritten. Check that you have sufficient access rights.
(33:345)
Unable to create new symbol library text A new symbol file cannot be created. Check that you have sufficient access rights.
(33:346)
Error reading symbol library text An existing symbol file cannot be read. Check that you have sufficient access rights.
(33:347)
Unable to locate key text in symbol library The specified SKEY cannot be found in the current symbol library.
(33:348) (33:349)
Row number integer is outside the range 1-999 Table number integer is outside the range 1-999 You have exceeded the limits of table definition for user-positioned text. See the ATEXT command.
(33:350)
Limit of integer user positional text records exceeded You have tried to position more than the current maximum limit of 100 text fields. See the ATEXT command.
(33:351)
Character size integer exceeds maximum limit of 99 You have specified a character height greater than the maximum limit of 99mm. See the ATEXT command.
(33:361)
Option number integer is outside the allowed range 1-140 Debug options must lie within the range 1-140.
(33:363)
Balloon size integer is outside the allowed range 1-5 You have specified an instrument balloon size outside the permitted range of 1-5 character widths.
(33:365)
The no of components :- integer is outside the allowed range 1-50 You may only turn off fallskew boxes for lengths of pipeline which contain no more than 50 components. See the FALLSKEWS command.
A:7
12.0

Error Messages
(33:368)
SPOOLNumbers must be positioned with table parameters User-positioned text for spool numbers must include X and Y offsets within its definition to form a tabular layout. See the POSITION command.
(33:386)
Bend radius outside allowable range 0 to 50 D The permitted range for standard bend radii is 0-50 pipe diameters.
(33:387)
Illegal value for bend radius You can not specify a standard bend radius of less than 1mm.
(33:399)
Maximum of 20 nested PCOM tappings exceeded Tapping legs off PCOMs or SHUs can themselves contain PCOMs or SHUs with tapping legs, up to a maximum limit of 20 levels of nesting.
(33:407)
Cannot detail at branch level for system iso Detailing at Branch level is restricted to single pipe isometrics. System isometrics must include complete pipes.
(33:408)
Plottingscale limits (50-100%) exceeded - reset to 100 Note: The plotting scale is limited to a reduction to a minimum of half size. Magnification is not permitted. The scaling factor has been reset automatically to 100%. Note: The following error messages are generated during the operation of ISODRAW. Those numbered (35:10xx) relate to the ISODAT program and those numbered (35:20xx) relate to the ISOPLOT program. Note: Refer to the AVEVA PDMS Customer Support Department for advice if you have unexplained errors at this stage of ISODRAFTs operations.
(35:1001) (35:1002)
OVER 200 ALTERNATIVE TEXT RECS FOLLOWING DATA IGNORED MORE THAN 200 TEXT RECORDS - DEFAULT TABLE USED The maximum number of non-standard text phrases which may be used at one time is 200 (see the ATEXT command).
(35:1004)
FITTING NOT FOUND - DEFAULT SHAPE USED A specified SKEY is not recognised. The relevant component will be indicated on the isometric drawing by the default rectangle symbol (see AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 11, Symbol Keys).
(35:1006) to (35:1014) (35:1015)
OVERFLOW IN DATA - PIPELINE REJECTED (message number depends on reason for overflow) This is a fatal error; the isometric will not be plotted. INVALID ITEM/DESCRIPTION POINTER
A:8
12.0

Error Messages
(35:1016)
ITEM CODE WIDTH ERROR - APPENDED TEXT LOST An itemcode contains more characters than the specified column width in the material list (see the ITEMCODE command).
(35:1017) (35:1018) (35:1019) (35:1020) (35:1021)
OVERFLOW IN DATA - CHECK DIMENSIONS NO FITTING DETAILS EXIST FOR FITTING CODE FITTINGS OVERLAP WHICH CANNOT BE CUT BACK INSUFFICIENT LENGTH ON OVERLAPPING FITTINGS TO ALLOW CUTBACK RUN ABORTED THE WIDTH OR HEIGHT (EXCLUDING BORDERS, MATERIAL LIST ETC) IS LESS THAN 50MM. THIS IS NOT ENOUGH ROOM FOR THE ISOMETRIC The layout specified for the drawing sheet does not leave enough room for the isometric drawing itself. The drawing will not therefore be plotted. See the FILE, SIZE and STACKINGARRANGEMENT commands.
(35:1022) (35:1023) (35:1024) (35:1025) (35:1084) (35:1100)
THE MATERIAL CODE IS TOO WIDE AND HAS BEEN CHANGED FROM ... TO ... THE TOTAL NUMBER OF ALLOWED CHARACTERS (3,900) IN FREE MESSAGES HAS BEEN EXCEEDED THE NUMBER OF FREE MESSAGES (50) HAS BEEN EXCEEDED THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS IN MESSAGE EXCEED (300) THE (LAST) MESSAGE BEGAN WITH ... Warning - Support shape not found Error - Unable to position ref.dimension using coordinates given - Ref dimension record co-ords are val val val - Ref dimension not shown on drawing
(35:1105)
Warning - Reference Dimension key not found - Default line shown An invalid or blank SKEY has been used for a reference dimension. See AVEVA PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 5, Design Requirements.
(35:2001) (35:2003) (35:2004) (35:2005) (35:2007) (35:2008) (35:2009) (35:2010)
DRAWING DELETED WELD NUMBERS HAVE CAUSED DATA OVERFLOW INPUT DATA OVERFLOW WARNING TEE OFF TEE >4 DEEP TEE IN SKEW DATA FAULT SKEW SKEW WITH NO CONTENTS FITTING WITH OFFSET NOT IN LINE WITH PIPE
A:9
12.0

Error Messages
(35:2011) (35:2012) (35:2013) (35:2014) (35:2015) (35:2016) (35:2017) (35:2018) (35:2020) (35:2021) (35:2023)
ANGLE FAIL DATA FAULT UP DOWN EAST WEST NORTH SOUTH DATA OVERFLOW, DRAWING REJECTED MESSAGE FAIL SHAPE FAIL TOO MANY COORDINATES IN FITTINGS TOO MANY FITTINGS WARNING, PAPER SIZE >A0 OR AD - THIS MAY PRODUCE UNACCEPTABLE RESULTS ISODRAFT does not recognise standard paper sizes larger than A0 or E. Larger sheet sizes can be specified by using the HEIGHT and WIDTH options. See the SIZE command.
(35:2024) (35:2025) (35:2026) (35:2027) (35:2028) (35:2029)
REJECTED, TOO MUCH DATA, TRY SMALLER SPLIT ... CHECK ... FAIL ... PLOTTED ... NOT PLOTTED ... DRG. These are used in progress summaries in the message file.
(35:2030)
WARNING PLOTFILE NUMBER HAS REACHED 999 NEXT PLOTFILE WILL OVERWRITE ...001 PLOT file names are suffixed with a three-digit number to avoid ambiguity. This limits the number of different PLOT files with the same basic file name to 999. See the FILE command.
(35:2031) (35:2035)
THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE ... READY FOR NEXT DRAWING. HIT RETURN TO GO This message appears on screen between plots when more than one drawing is to be output to a graphics terminal.
(35:2036) (35:2037) (35:2038) (35:2039)
THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS WERE SENT TO THE TERMINAL ERROR OPENING UNDERLAY PLOTFILE ERROR READING PLOTFILE PLOTFILE INCOMPATIBLE PAPER SIZE
A:10
12.0

Error Messages
(35:2040) (35:2041) (35:2042) (35:2043) (35:2044)
BAD PLOT CODE - PLOTFILE PROBABLY CORRUPT THE SCHEMA PLOTFILE OPTION HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF SPECIFIED PLOTFILE LENGTH ... ... IS LESS THAN DRAWING LENGTH PLOTFILE LENGTH HAS BEEN INCREASED TO ...
A:11
12.0

Error Messages
A:12
12.0

Examples of Isometric Plots

3 0 4 1 1 9 2 2 1 G F R O D 1
9 2 2
7 0 4
O T . N N O C
2 N / 2 P M U P D 0 E 5 E 89 F7 31 -9 5+ N4 1 O L CW SE 4 1 B 3 1 G 9 F 2
0 1 9 8 5 S N 2 " 6 S N " 6 9 2 2 2 9 4
O T . N N O C
1 0 N 2 /22 1 811 5 060 + 146 L CWS E 5 1 B 2 1 G 8 F
2 6 9 1 2 4 04 SN "8 1 ] 4[ 2 1 G 8 F 704 6
9 2 2 7
7 0 4 9 2 2 2 8 7 1 6 5 3 6 5 3 0 5 9 1 + 7 L E 2 260 2 S N " 8 x 38 S N " 6 x 48 9 2 6 1
4 1 B 3 1 1 G 1 9 F
L0 T5 A1 MA 3 8 4 1 1 2 1 89 0 72 4 05 + 44 L WS E
2 1 G 8 F
8 9 9 1 L U J 7 2 : E T A D
m e t s y S e t a s n e d n o C : F E R H C T A B
A 1 A : C E P S G N I P I P
2 602
0 1 2 N / 1 P M U P D 0 E 5 E 789 F 931 - 85+ N 11 O L C WSE
0 5 9 1 + L 7 E
S N " 6 x 4 8
6 6 1
O T . N N O C 7
8 7 1
S ] N 1 " [ 8
5 2 6 6 1 2 1 690 424 15+ 54 L WSE
0 0 6 1
D EE CP AI RP T D EE GP GI AP L T R O EP PP IU PS N O I ET TC IE SN N O C NT PN MI OO CJ D ET WN EI RO CJ S T ED KL CE OW S D LD EL IE FW PD OL HE SW
k r o w t e N _ t e l t u O
2 ] 3 [
6 0 2 2
4 9 4 1
2 ] 2 [ 0 0 1 2
N
YTQE D O C M E T I MM 22 .. 11 1 1 2 21 8 3 2 2 2 YTQE D O C M E T I ---3 2 6 8 1 1
O N L O O P S E P I P S E T O N E D ] 1 [
O N T S I L S T R A P S E T O N E D 1
00 05 21 aa PP
5 1 X 0 0 00 0 0 0 00 5 2 2 22 1 a A ca a T T KE E 86 xx 8 8 88 6
0 0 0 5 2 1 w w F F
0 5 1 c B
0 5 1 g B
0 0 0 5 2 1 c c G G
0 0 0 0 1 1 R T B B B B S S 6 6 1 1 / / 3 3 1 1
9 5 A G
) .S SN .I N( -
86
8 6 5 0 1 A M T S A F R . 0 5 1 # 5 . 6 1 B I S N A N W S -E E -G G -N N -A A -L L -F F 5 0 1 A M T S A F R . 0 5 1 # 5 . 6 1 B I S N A N W E G N A L F
6 M T S A 0 5 1 # W B 0 1 . 6 1 B I S N A K H C G N I W S E V L A V 0 1
) .S SN .I N(
8 6 B S A & S S 0 5 1 # 5 . 6 1 B I S N A M M 5 . 1 F R S- T T- E E- K K- S S- A A- G GB S A & S S 0 5 1 # 5 . 6 1 B I S N A M M 5 . 1 F R T E K S A G
8 L E K C I N % 9 F R . 0 5 1 # 0 1 . 6 1 B I S N A E T A G E L V E L E A T V S 6 1
| S L A I R E T A M N O I T A C I R B A F |
N O I T P I R C S E D T N E N O P M O C
B L 5 I P A 0 1 . 6 3 B I S N A 0 4 H C S E E- P P- I I- P P-
B L 5 I P A 0 1 . 6 3 B I S N A 0 4 H C S E P I P
S G N I T T I F
B P W 4 3 2 A M T S A W B 9 . 6 1 B I S N A E E T
B P W 4 3 2 A M T S A W B 9 . 6 1 B I S N A E E T
BB PP WW -44 33 22 AA MM TT SS AA WW BB 99 .. 66 11 BB II SS NN AA GR NL O LW O PB AL CE
B P W 4 3 2 A M T S A W B 9 . 6 1 B I S N A R L W O B L E
S M E T I E N I L N I / S E V L A V
B C W 6 1 2 A
M T S A 0 5 1 # W B 0 1 . 6 1 B I S N A E T A G E V L A V 1 1
B C W 6 1 2 A
| S L A I R E T A M N O I T C E R E |
N O I T P I R C S E D T N E N O P M O C
H 2 / 7 B 3 9 1 A M T S A S T U N 2 W C D U T S S T -0 L -0 O -1 B -
H 2 / 7 B 3 9 1 A M T S A S T U N 2 W C D U T S 0 0 1
S M E T I E N I L N I / S E V L A V
0 6 . 7 1 ] 4 [ ] 3 [ ] 2 [ ] 1 [ 0 8 . 4 ) S N I ( S N E P I P
S L O O P S E P I P
TO PN -
12
3 4 56 7
8 9
T OP N-
2 3 1 1
4 5 1 1
H T G N E L L C
Figure B:1.
Combined Fabrication & Erection Isometric with Materials List
B:1
12.0
Figure B:2.
2062
21 00
[2] 16 00
[3]
8x6"NS 2 166
2062
MATL A150 292
407
404
[1] 8"NS
[4] 8"NS

22 06
49 2
229
6"NS 407 229 EL +1950 229

14 94 6" N 58 S 9
Fabrication-Only Isometric
403
22 9
B:2
29 16
407 229
8x6"NS 8x8"NS
35 6 6 35
178
2 166
178
14
EL +1950 83
DATE: 27 JUL 1998 BATCH REF: Condensate System PIPING SPEC: A1A
SHOPFIELD SOCKET SCREWED COMPN SITE PIPE LAGGED TRACED WELDWELD WELD JOINT JOINT CONNECTION SUPPORT PIPE PIPE
[1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO
Outlet_Network
DRG 1 OF 1
12.0
N
5 6
Figure B:3.
06 22
2062
[2] 21 00
[3] 16 00
15
2062
[4] 8"NS
W 5146 S 4529 EL +4012
W 4078 S 4529 EL +4012
404
28
407

17 11
CONN. TO CON-FEED-PUMP-1/N2 W 1897 S 1538 EL +1950

49 2
9 18
22 9
6"NS
4 7 10
94 14
8
CONN. TO CON-FEED-PUMP-2/N2 W 497 S 1538 25 EL +1950 229 407
6"N S
58 9
23 24
EL +1950
229
229 403
21
229
16
Erection-Only Isometric
407
22
B:3
8x6"NS
14
16
29
2
12
166
13 26
19
8x8"NS
2
178
6 35
27 1
20
[1] 8"NS 2 166
EL +1950 178 8x6"NS 356

14 83
CONN. TO C-108/N1 W 4612 S 6012 EL +5120

31
30
292
29
MATL A150
DATE: 27 JUL 1998 BATCH REF: Condensate System PIPING SPEC: A1A
SHOPFIELD SOCKET SCREWED COMPN SITE PIPE LAGGED TRACED WELDWELD WELD JOINT JOINT CONNECTION SUPPORT PIPE PIPE
[1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO 1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO
Outlet_Network
DRG 1 OF 1
12.0

B:4
12.0

Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module

PDMS ISODRAFT has a facility to transfer material information to the COMPIPE module of the John Brown Systems COMDACE system. This is achieved by the output of two files containing COMPIPE Linelist and MTO data. You can control the production and content of these files. COMPIPE component Short Codes are accessed direct from the PDMS catalog databases, providing pointers into the COMPIPE piping specification.
C.1
Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFT

The COMPIPE interface is switched on by specifying a single file prefix, used to define the Linelist and MTO files. ISODRAFT will create files using this prefix with suffixes of .LINE and .MTO, together with a three digit number of the form 001, taking the next file in sequence in the directory. To set the file prefix enter the command:
COMPIPEFile
/<filename>.
To switch off this facility, enter the command COMPIPEFile OFF. For example, the command COMPIPEFile /comp would produce Linelist files of the form comp.LINE001, comp.LINE002, etc. and MTO files of the form comp.MTO001, comp.MTO002, etc.
C.2
Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE Files

The options that affect the contents of the COMPIPE files generated by ISODRAFT are:
COMPIPE MTO DRWG COMPIPE MTO PIPE COMPIPE ITEMcodes User COMPIPE ITEMcodes Client COMPIPE DESCriptions Short COMPIPE DESCriptions Long COMPIPE SUPPorts ON COMPIPE SUPPorts OFF
Lists material by individual isometric drawing sheet. Lists material by complete pipeline. Instructs COMPIPE to use user itemcodes. Instructs COMPIPE to use client temcodes. Instructs COMPIPE to use short descriptions. Instructs COMPIPE to use long descriptions. Includes supports from the MTO file. Excludes supports from the MTO file.
C:1
12.0

These may be chained. The default condition is COMPIPE MTO DRWG ITEMcodes User DESCriptions Short SUPPorts ON. Note that a materiallist overflow option other than MATEriallist DUMMy (the default condition) must be used with COMPIPE MTO DRWG.
C.3
Pipe Attributes
Four text attributes of pipe are used by the COMPIPE interface. These are:
CARE COMPIPE DESCRIPTION CDRG COMPIPE CNUM COMPIPE
area up to 4 characters, mandatory Pipeline description up to 80 characters, optional drawing number up to 24 characters, optional line number up to 14 characters, optional
The CNUM attribute is available so that a line number may be stored for COMPIPE purposes that differs from the PDMS pipe NAME. If CNUM is blank or unset, the first 14 characters of the NAME will be used. Note that the pipeline DESCRIPTION is output in the Linelist file. This should not be confused with the option for COMPIPE DESCRIPTIONS, which is an instruction in the MTO file to COMPIPE on how to output component descriptions in its reports.
C.4
Detail Text Attributes

Two attributes of detail texts (ADTEX - HDTEX) are used by the COMIPE interface. These are:
SCOD CSPC COMPIPE
Short Code up to 3 characters, mandatory Specification up to 6 characters, optional
All components, tube and bolts must have a short code, unless they are to be treated in COMPIPE as out-of-spec items. In this case they may only be handled as additional items on the material list. If any other component is found to have no short code, no COMPIPE files will be generated for the whole pipeline. For standard assemblies, the short code of SAN must be used. Standard assemblies are listed in the MTO file with their itemcodes (truncated to 8 characters) as their standard assembly numbers. The COMPIPE Specification attribute allows a COMPIPE Specification name to be used that differs from the PDMS Pipe Specification name. If CSPC is blank or unset, the PDMS Pipe Specification of the component will be used (truncated to 6 characters).
C.5
C.5.1
Limitations
Itemcodes containing the / character
The slash (/) character is used by default as a delimiter within the Intermediate Data File (transfer file) between itemcodes, short codes and COMPIPE Spec names. Therefore, if itemcodes are to contain slash characters (e.g. in the case of ITEMCODE LENGTH LONG
C:2
12.0

where the specification name is included), an alternative delimiter must be set as ATEXT 299. Note that it is the itemcode after SPEC name and trailing delimiter characters have been removed that is important. Since the slash character is often used within PDMS names, ISODRAFT will automatically set Atext 299 to the tilde (~) character when COMPIPEFILE is set. This can then be changed if required, e.g. use ATExt 299 :.
C.5.2
Instruments and Supports Tag Names

Instrument and support names will be output in the MTO files only if the options INSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used. Instrument and support itemcodes will never be output in the MTO files.
C.5.3
Material per Isometric Sheet

In order to obtain MTO per isometric drawing, a material list overflow option that may insert extra sheet numbers should not be used. Instead, use one of:
MATEriallist OVER MATEriallist DUMMy SUFFix MATEriallist DUMMy SUFFix SINGle

If the default option MATEriallist DUMMy is used, a warning occurs in the message file. It states Compipe material accumulation per drawing conflicts with material list generated on isometric. Compipe materials accumulated per pipeline. Any isometrics splitting onto more than one sheet will be accompanied by MTO files listing all materials for the pipeline as if on a single sheet.
C.5.4
Specification Breaks
The output of Alternative Spec records and the subsequent addition of the Y prefix to each Short Code from the new specification is affected by the SPECBreak option. If SPECBreak BRANch is used, e.g. to suppress specbreaks for instruments from a special instruments specification on the isometric, then these items will be output in the MTO file as if from the standard specification.
C.5.5
System and Spool Isometrics

COMPIPE files will not be produced for system isometrics or spool isometrics.
C.5.6
Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ON

These will fail to update the database when COMPIPEFile is used in conjunction with a CNUM. The actual pipe NAME must be used in order to allow these database updates.
C:3
12.0

C.6
Format of COMPIPE Linelist File

The Linelist file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of three records for each pipeline in the batch: Batch Header Line List Header Delivery Point Details Line Description for each pipeline for each pipeline for each pipeline
In the following record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the * character is a record terminator.The Batch Header record is defined thus:
BATCH888821JAN99LINEPROJNUMB
where:
BATCH 8888 21JAN99 LINE PROJNUMB
is a fixed record identifier is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number is the run date when the pipe was detailed is a fixed identifier for a Linelist file is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)
The Line List Header record is defined thus:
A:AREA:LINENUMBER:PIPE SPEC:NO OF SHEETS:MAIN SIZE::PAINT SPEC:INSU SPEC::*

where
A AREA LINENUMBER PIPE SPEC NO OF SHEETS MAIN SIZE PAINT SPEC INSU SPEC
is a fixed record identifier is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters) is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14 characters) is from the pipe PSPEC (truncated to 6 characters) is the number of isometric sheets for the pipeline, e.g. 02 is the largest nominal size in the pipe, of the form 1.1/2, 6, etc. for imperial, and 25, 80, etc. for metric is from the paint specification (truncated to 6 characters) is from the insulation specification (truncated to 6 characters)
The Delivery Point Details record is defined thus:
D::::::*
C:4
12.0

This is a dummy record, normally used for delivery point and date information during manual input. Such information is not available from ISODRAFT. The Line Description record is defined thus:
H:DESCRIPTION*
where:
H DESCRIPTION
is a fixed record identifier is from the pipe DESC attribute (max 80 characters). If no description has been entered in PDMS, a dummy record of the form H:* is output.
C.7
Format of COMPIPE MTO FIle

The MTO file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of records for each pipeline or isometric sheet: Batch Header MTO Line Header MTO Drawing Header Component records (one record for each material list entry) | | for each pipeline isometric sheet
A maximum of 200 pipelines or isometric sheets may be included in each file. In the following record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the * character is a record terminator. The Batch Header record is defined thus:
BATCH888821JAN99MATOPROJNUMB
where:
BATCH 8888 21JAN99 MATO PROJNUMB
is a fixed record identifier is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number is the run date when the pipe was detailed is a fixed identifier for an MTO file is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)
The MTO Line Header record is defined thus:
$L:AREA:LINENUMBER:SHEET NO:RUNTYPE::U or C:S or L*
C:5
12.0

where:
$L AREA LINENUMBER SHEET NO RUNTYPE U or C S or L
is a fixed record identifier is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters) is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14 characters) is the isometric sheet number, e.g. 01 is data type transferred, always set to A (Actual) signifies reports will have User or Client Itemcodes signifies reports will have Short or Long Descriptions
The Drawing Header record is defined thus:
$D:DRWGNUMBER::REVISION*
where:
$D DRWGNUMBER REVISION
is a fixed record identifier is from the pipe CDRG attribute (max 24 characters) is from the pipe REV attribute (max 2 characters)
If the CDRG attribute for a pipe is unset or blank, a drawing number will be automatically generated, based on the pipe nominal size and name. This will take the form:
1.1/2PIPENAME 40MM-PIPENAME
for pipes using imperial bores for pipes using metric bores (MM- is the default Atext 453)
Each component entry on the material list has an equivalent entry in the MTO file. Components are classified as in-spec being in the specification set at pipe level, alternative-spec being in a different specification, and out-of-spec being in no pipe specification (a concept PDMS does not have). The in-Spec Component record is defined thus:
n::SHORT CODE:TAG NUMBER:1st NS:2nd NS:3rd NS:QUANTITY:BOLTLENGTH:*
where:
= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE
SHORT CODE TAG NUMBER 1st NS 2nd NS
is from the detail texts SCOD (max 3 characters) unique identifier (max 8 characters), see Notes is main size, of the form 1.1/2 (imperial) or 40 (metric) is second size (format as for 1st NS)
C:6
12.0

n 3rd NS QUANTITY BOLTLENGTH

Notes:
= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag is third size (format as for 1st NS) is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets (max 6 characters) is length of bolts, see Notes
1. Short code is a reference to a component entry in the Compipe specification. 2. Instruments and supports take a tag number from their PDMS name if the options INSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used. 3. Standard assemblies take a tag number of their itemcode, which is not unique, but is the same for all assemblies of the same content/configuration, i.e. standard assembly number. 4. Quantity is an integer number for components, or a length for tube. For bolts it is the number of sets, not the number of bolts. Also for bolts, the size is the pipeline nominal size, not the bolt diameter. 5. Boltlength is preceded by the character H to indicate an override to COMPIPE. Metric lengths take the form H120.0. Imperial lengths take the form H4.3/4. Where a change of spec occurs in the pipeline, an Alternative Spec record is output, defined thus:
n::YY:ALTERNATESPEC:::::*
where:
n YY ALTERNATESPEC
= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE is a fixed identifier to indicate alternative spec is the alternative spec name (max 6 characters)
Components from the alternative spec then follow, with records to the same format as inspec components, except that a Y character is output as a prefix to their short code. A return to the standard spec for the pipe is indicated by the additional Y character no longer being output. Note that the output of Alternative spec records may be suppressed if the SPECBreak BRANch option is used. Out-of-specification components take two records, defined thus:
n:::ITEMCODE:QUANTITY*
where:
= 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE
ITEMCODE QUANTITY N.S.:::::::*
is from the components itemcode (max 12 characters) is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets
C:7
12.0

where: N.S. is the nominal size of the component
Note: Out-of-specification components can only be from additional items on the material list' in ISODRAFT, i.e. not normal pipeline components.
C:8
12.0

Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

Introduction
Isometrics produced using ISODRAFT can be passed into MicroStation as DXF files for amendment or the production of a DGN equivalent for issue. These notes refer only to MicroStation/J and the DXF files produced from ISODRAFT. A straightforward import of an ISODRAFT DXF file into a freshly installed version of MicroStation/J produces a picture which has accurate rendition of the isometric vectors but fonts and colour are not correct. Neither can a plot be produced, as the colour is white on white. The comments in these notes refer mainly to fonts and colour and how to bring them into line with the original isometric. Experienced MicroStation users may know simpler ways of doing this.
D.1
D.2
Importing a DXF File

MicroStation has basic facilities for the importation of DXF files. You have the chance to do this when invoking MicroStation or if already running MicroStation then the Edit>Import menu would be used. During import you may be invited to change various parameters to do with the control of DXF/DGN translations. Initially at least these should be ignored and the DXF file simply opened to observe the results.
D.3
Fonts
PDMS has a very large number of font files that have been assembled over a long period from the public domain, in-house and the user community. They have all been translated to the AutoCAD standard and take the form of pairs of source (.shp) and compiled (.shx) files.
D.3.1
Installing Fonts
ISODRAFT uses only one set of PDMS text style/font associations: Text style HTX1 Font o8116901
D:1
12.0

To make AutoCAD-type fonts available within MicroStation the relevant fonts must be installed into MicroStation using the standard facilities:
D.3.2
Utilities/Install Fonts menu.

To keep them separate the required fonts should be installed into a new font library called, perhaps, pdms.rsc which should be placed with the supplied libraries in the path:
... \bentley\workspace\system\symb
MicroStation refers to fonts by a number not by the name. Now use the Element>Text menu to check the installation. The newly installed fonts should be visible together with the font numbers assigned by MicroStation to the new fonts. If required you may change the MicroStation font number as follows: 1. Use the Utilities>Install Fonts menu to give the Font installer dialog box. 2. Select font file on destination and change to desired font number. The new fonts will not yet be visible to the MicroStation import function.
D.4
DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the Import Function

DXF/DGN Import and export operations refer to a compiled file which on installed MicroStation/J is:
...\bentley\home\prefs\dwgdata\dwgcontrol.bas
On some installations, this may alternatively be:
...\bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg\dwg.bas
This file is a macro file written in the MicroStation macro language BASIC that controls several areas where translations between DWG and DGN are specified. One of these areas is font mapping. For AutoCAD fonts the font style is obtained from the shx/shp font file and a shape file may have many styles. In MicroStation/J this condition is recognised. In order to map a particular style associated with a font file to the required MicroStation font number, it is necessary to include extra information in the font section of the translation control file. For example:
MbeFontNameTable.addImportEntry "htx1", "o8116901", 168, 1.09, 0
The last two optional parameters enable control of text width and text obliquity (slope) which MicroStation does not handle well. This line maps style htx1 in font file o8116901.shx to the MicroStation font 168 using an X scaling factor of 1.09 and no oblique characters. The value of 1.09 for this particular mapping was obtained by experiment and compensates for the arbitrary character spacing output by ISODRAFT. For the PDMS fonts there is one style per file.
D.5
Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control File

The MicroStation/J macro control file, dwgcontrol.bas, should be compiled after editing.
D:2
12.0

1. On the Utilities>Macro window choose Browse 2. Select dwgcontrol.bas. 3. Running the macro constitutes compilation. It is possible that when the macro is run an error message will appear. In this case the necessary DXF/DGN translators are not yet available to MicroStation and to make them available it is necessary to use the import function on any DXF file: 1. On the file/import menu choose DWG or DXF and load any DXF file. 2. Now repeat the Utilities>Macro actions above, and exit MicroStation. 3. On restart using the DXF option, the font translation will be active and a true rendition of text should be seen.
D.6 D.7
Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts)

It is not possible to install any 16 bit font (.shx) file into MicroStation/J or earlier.
Colour
There is no explicit colour information in the ISODRAFT DXF file. The PDMS colour information is implicit. This is because of a convention used, which associates a layer name with a colour. This means that layer name GT_n in the DXF file means PDMS colour n. Thus all objects with the same colour are on the same DXF layer. In MicroStation an incoming DXF file turns on a default colour table that appears to be the default colour table used by AutoCAD: Individual objects have the default colour value 6 (on a scale starting at 0) which translates to the AutoCAD default 7 (on a scale starting at 1). The colour value is white so everything is white and there can never be any discrimination between colours. Symbology is not set for any object, so when it is turned on everything changes to red (0), which is 1 on the AutoCAD default table.
The PDMS colour information in the DXF file delivered as GT_ layer names may be translated to MicroStation level values by use of the layer/level mapping file used in the import process. The default file for this is: dwglevel.tbl (in ..\Bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg). Thus PDMS colours 1 - 12 (Layers GT_1 to GT_2) may be made manifest in the DGN file as levels 1 - 12 by additional entries to this file: Layer in DXF file GT_1 GT 2 . GT_12 Level 1 2 . 12
In order to produce true PDMS colours in MicroStation DGN files, it will be necessary to provide a key-in command as a mdl (MicroStation Development Language) function that will map the DGN levels to PDMS colours.
D:3
12.0

D.8
Plotting the DGN file

To get a normal black and white plot of the MicroStation DGN file created on import it is necessary to reduce the number of colours set in the active file: printer.plt. The value of num_pens in this file should be changed from 255 to 1.
D:4
12.0
Index
A
ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9 Adding elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9 ALLO attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69 Alternative texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 ANGLEACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10 ATEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11 Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 ATTAs:identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:13 ATTAs:split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:104 ATTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12 AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
B
Bend table:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 Bending table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92 Bendradius:bend table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15 Bendradius:radii description units . . . . . 2:15 Bendradius:standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15 Blank area, reserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105 Bolt Report:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 Bolt Report:file specification . . . . . . . . . 2:17 Bolt Report:output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20 BOLTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18 Bolting:length descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 2:18 BOLTREPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20 BORES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21 Bores:units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21
Character size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7 CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24 CLLENGTHFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2 Commands:abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2 Commands:arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2 COMPIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1 COMPIPE:Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1, C:4 COMPIPE:Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:1 COMPIPE:MTO file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C:5 COMPIPE:Pipe attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2 COMPIPE:Text attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . C:2 Continuation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:27 Continuation symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:27 Continuation welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28 Continuation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27 CONTNOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:27 COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28 COORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28 Creating macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101 Cut pipe list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33 CUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30 CUTMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32 Cutmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32 CUTPIPELISTFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33 CUTTINGLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
D
Date:format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default settings:resetting . . . . . . . . . . . DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design conditions table . . . . . . . . . . . . DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36 2:83 2:37 2:92 2:38
C
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . 2:22 character height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24, 2:95
Index page 1
12.0
Detail areas, dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 DETAILPLOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92 DIMDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:41 Dimensioning style . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:43 Dimensions:drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . 2:107 Distance units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:47 DISTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:47 Drawing history table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92 dxf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 Dynamic detail areas:Atexts . . . . . . . . . 4:10
J
JOINTNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:66
K
Kanji:EUC format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 Kanji:SHIFTJS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67
L
Line Summary:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 LINETHICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:68 LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE . . 2:69, 3:15
E
ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:49 Elevation coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:49 Erection details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
M
MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:69 Margin:width specification . . . . . . . . . . 2:69 MARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:70 MATCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72 Material Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Material Control File:Creating . . . . . . . . 5:1 Material Control File:creating . . . . . . . . 2:72 Material Control File:Definition . . . . . . . . 5:1 Material Control File:extended . . . . . . . . 5:1 Material Control File:Format . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Material descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 2:48, 2:82 Material list:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6, 4:9 Material List:displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73 Material list:item numbering . . . . . . . . . 2:49 MATERIALLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73 MATLISTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:79 Measurement units . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:128 MESSAGEFILENAME . . . . . . . . . 2:80, 2:81 MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 MTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:82
F
Fabrication details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62 Fall rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:50 FALLINGLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:50 FALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54 FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 File:message file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:81 File:specifying plot file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 File:transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98, 2:99 Flow arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:57 FLOWARROWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57 format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33 Frame lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58
G
Grip length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:30
I
INSTALL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58 INSTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59 Instruments:display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:59 Insulation:plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:60 INSULATIONCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60 ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61 Isometric Drawing Area#_IsoDrawingArea 4:1 Isometric:annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91 Isometric:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Isometric:display of information . . . . . . 2:62 Isometric:plotting scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90 Isometric:scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:88 ISOTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62 Item numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:49 ITEMCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:63, 2:65
N
Numbering joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:66 Numbering pulled bends . . . . . . . . . . . 2:87
O
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83 OUTCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:83 OVERALLSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:87
P
PBENDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:87 PICTURESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:88
Index page 2
12.0
PLOTDETAILDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:89 Plotted leg length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:68 Plotting isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38 PLOTTINGSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90 POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91 PRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98 PREPROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:98 PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99 Project number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99 PROJECTNUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99
Q
Querying options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:100
R
RECREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:101 REFDIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102 Reference dimensions . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:102 Relative text positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:94 REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102 Removing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102 REPEATABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104 RESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105
Symbol keys:LJSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21 Symbol keys:OLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30 Symbol keys:PCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21 Symbol keys:REDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25 Symbol keys:reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:42 Symbol keys:SHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30 Symbol keys:TEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:30 Symbol keys:TRAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:34 Symbol keys:UNIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36 Symbol keys:UNIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36 Symbol keys:Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:36 Symbol keys:VALV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:37 Symbol keys:VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39 Symbol keys:VFWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39 Symbol keys:VTWA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:40 Symbol keys:WELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:41 Symbol library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120 SYMBOLFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120
T
TAGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:120 TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:121 Text:positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91 Text:rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:91 TEXTPOSITION, see POSITION . . . . . 2:91 Title block:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5 TITLEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:122 TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:123 TRACINGCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:124 Transfer file:creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:24 Transfer file:processing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:99 TRANSFERFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . 2:125 TRUNCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:126 TUBESPLITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:127
S
Screen layout:saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:58 SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106, 2:107 SKEWBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:107 Skewed piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:107 Spatial coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7, 2:28 SPECBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:113 SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:114 Splitting drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:114 Splitting tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:127 SPOOLNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:115 STACKINGARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . 2:117 SUPPORTFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:118 SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:119 Symbol keys:BEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 Symbol keys:CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3 Symbol keys:CLOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4 Symbol keys:COUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4 Symbol keys:CROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 Symbol keys:definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Symbol keys:deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37 Symbol keys:ELBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 Symbol keys:FBLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Symbol keys:FILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Symbol keys:FLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13 Symbol keys:FTUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15 Symbol keys:INST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
U
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME . . . . . . . . . . 2:127 UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:128 User Defined Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92
V
View direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61
W
WASTAGE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:130 Weld Box:Atexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9 Weld table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92 WELDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:131 WELDNUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:132 Welds:identification . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:131
Index page 3
12.0
Welds:numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:132 Welds:types displayed . . . . . . . . 2:8, 2:134 WELDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:134
Z
ZEROLENGTHSKEWS . . . . . . . . . . . 2:135
Index page 4
12.0

ISODRAFT Reference Manual (EDocFind - Info)

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ISODRAFT Reference Manual (EDocFind - Info)

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ISODRAFT Reference Manual

AVEVA Solutions Ltd